Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus
may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual sup-
plied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the
operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Contents
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B62564E1/02
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
s2
B62564E1/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factoryset. Usually, there is not need to change
them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that
you fully understand the function of the parameter before making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until
the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations.
Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the
machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.
7. The operators manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall
description of the machines functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optional
functions will vary from one machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described
in the manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification
of the machine if in doubt.
s3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B62564E1/02
WARNING
8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machinetool builder. When
using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machinetool builder for details of
their use and any related cautions.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently,
however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error
recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup
all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
s4
B62564E1/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to
perform programming, read the supplied operators manual and programming manual carefully
such that you are fully familiar with their contents.
WARNING
s5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B62564E1/02
WARNING
6. Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke
check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when
stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly
damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7. Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data specified during automatic
operation. If the tool specification does not match the tool actually being used, the interference
check cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing
injury to the user.
After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start automatic
operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.
8. Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine
may behave unexpectedly.
9. Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned
cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective
functions for details.
10. Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified
without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed without
performing a skip.
11. Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is
enabled.
12. Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command
is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in
the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation function
mode.
s6
B62564E1/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before
attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied operators manual and programming manual
carefully, such that you are fully familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1. Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified
correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2. Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the
machine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave
unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is
performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3. Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command have been specified
correctly, and that the entered values are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may damage the tool,
the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
4. Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes
the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or
cause injury to the user.
5. Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading, rigid
tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
6. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under the
control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging
the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the user.
s7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B62564E1/02
WARNING
Using the software operators panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel,
it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operators panel, such as mode
change, override value change, and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury
to the user.
9. Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path
may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual
intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
10. Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro
system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.
11. Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machine
operates at dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Note
that the dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool
nose radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt
in automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention
to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions
of the corresponding functions for details.
13. Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion,
or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control
of that program. Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.
s8
B62564E1/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such
as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators
panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNCs memory will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operators manual or programming manual for details of
the battery replacement procedure.
s9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B62564E1/02
WARNING
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators
panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operators manual or programming manual for details of
the battery replacement procedure.
s10
B62564E1/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance in the operators manual or
programming manual describes the fuse replacement procedure.
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered highvoltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
s11
B62564E1/02 PREFACE
PREFACE
(*) The FANUC Series 15MEK/MELMODEL B4 is a softwarefixed CNC capable of 4 contouring axes
switchable out of 8 axes for milling machines and machining centers.
Further the following functions can not be used in the 15MEK or 15MEL.
D Increment system D/E (Increment system C is an option function)
D Helical interpolation B
D Plane switching
D Designation direction tool length compensation
D 2 axes electric gear box
D Manual interruption of 3dimensional coordinate system conversion
D 3dimensional cutter compensation
D Trouble diagnosis guidance
D OSI/ETHERNET function
D Highprecision contour control using RISC
D Macro compiler (self compile function)
D MMCIII, MMCIV
D Smooth interpolation
D Connecting for personal computer by highspeed serialbus
p1
PREFACE B62564E1/02
p2
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p1
I. OPERATION
1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1 Setting and Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1.1 MDI keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1.2 Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1.3 Key input and input buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1.4 Changing the contents of the key input buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1.5 Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.6 Soft key display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.7 When the soft keys are insufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.8 Changing soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.1.9 Outline of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.10 Function selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.11 Chapter selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.1.12 Operation selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1.13 Operation guidance keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.1.14 Changing language of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.1.15 Arithmetic key (SHIFT and ALTER key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2 Machine Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3 Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3.1 Tape reader without reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3.2 Tape reader with reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.3.3 Portable tape reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.3.4 Note for handling tape reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.4 FANUC PPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3. POWER ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.1 Manual Reference Position Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.2 Manual Continuous Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.3 Incremental Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4 Manual Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.5 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.6 Manual Numeric Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.7 Manual Absolute ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.8 Effect of Manual Intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.9 ThreeDimensional Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.9.1 Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.9.2 Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
c1
4.9.3 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.9.4 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool . . . . . . . . 86
4.9.5 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal
direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.9.6 Notes on threedimensional handle feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.9.7 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.9.8 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance . . . . 89
4.10 Manual Interruption Function for ThreeDimensional Coordinate Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.10.1 Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.10.2 Manual interruption and the coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1 Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1.1 Operation in the tape mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1.2 Operation in the MEMORY mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1.3 MDI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.2 Selecting a Program to be Executed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.1 Searching for a program number or sequence number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.2 Searching for a program by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.2.3 Rewinding a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.3 Starting Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.4 Executing Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.5 Stopping Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.1 Program stop (M00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.2 Optional stop (M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.3 Program end (M02, M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.4 Feed hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.5 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.5.6 Singleblock stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers . . . . . . 100
5.6 Restarting Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.6.1 Program restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.6.2 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.6.3 Block restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.6.4 Tool retraction and recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.6.5 Retrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.7 Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.7.1 Manual handle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.7.2 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.8 Override Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
c2
6.6.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.6.4 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
c3
10.5 Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.6 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.7 Pitch Error Compensation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
10.8 Data Protection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.9 Measuring the Tool Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.10 Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10.10.1 Class B measurement of the tool length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10.10.2 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.11 Menu Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
10.12 Tool Life Management Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.1 Displaying and modifying a tool group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.2 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.3 Presetting a tool life counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.4 Clearing execution data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.5 Display format of tool life data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
10.12.6 Tool change signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.7 Resetting a tool change signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.8 New tool selection signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.9 Tool skip signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.10 Expanded tool life management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
10.13 Software Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
10.14 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
10.14.1 Selecting the tool data screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
10.14.2 Setting tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
10.15 Setting the Floating Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
10.16 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.16.1 Servo screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.16.2 Spindle screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
10.16.3 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
10.17 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
10.17.1 Subscreen states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
10.17.2 Subscreen operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10.17.3 Data displayed on the subscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
10.17.4 Subscreen operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.18 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.18.1 Selecting RS232C Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.18.2 Details of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.18.3 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.18.4 Help Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
10.19 Screen for Specifying HighSpeed and HighPrecision Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
10.19.1 Screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
10.19.2 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
10.19.3 Tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
10.19.4 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.19.5 Setting by specifying accelerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.20 M Code Group Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
c4
10.20.1 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or
Which Have Already Been Executed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10.20.2 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10.20.3 M Code Group Check Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
10.20.4 Details of Grouping M codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
10.21 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10.21.1 Screen Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10.21.2 Operation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10.21.3 Workpiece zero point measurement B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10.22 Transverse Inhibit Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
c5
11.13.5 Editing a displayed waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.13.6 Erasing a displayed waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.13.7 Waveform data input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.14 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.14.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.14.2 Help window states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
11.15 Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
11.15.1 Operation history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
11.15.2 Selecting signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
11.15.3 Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
11.15.4 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
11.16 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
11.17 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
c6
15.2 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
15.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
15.4 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
II. MAINTENANCE
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
1.1 Cleaning the Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
1.2 Tape Reader Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
1.3 Adjusting the PhotoAmplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
1.4 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabinet Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
4. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.1 Symptom and Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.2 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming,
Operation, Machine, and Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
4.3 Visually Checking the CNC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
4.4 CNC Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.4.1 How to display the CNC internal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.4.2 Description of internal selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A. STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET . . . 439
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
2. INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
3. RS232C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
3.1 Names of RS232C Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
3.2 Signal Description of RS232C Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.3 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
3.4 Connection between RS232C Interface and I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
c7
4.2 Explanation of RS422 Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
4.3 RS422 Interface Transmission Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.4 Connection between RS422C Interface and Input/Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
c8
I. OPERATION
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
1) Manual operation
a) Manual reference position return (See Section 4.1)
The memory in the CNC machine tool holds the positional data for setting the machine.
This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set. Ordi-
narily, after the power is turned on, the tool is moved to the reference position.
Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference position using switches and push-
buttons located on the operators panel.
The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands.
This operation is called automatic reference position return. (See Section 7.1)
b) The tool movement by manual operation
Using operators panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along
each axis.
3
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
Program
Tool
01000 ;
M-S-T-;
G92X-Y-Z-;
G00 . . . ;
G01 . . . . . . ;
.
.
.
.
.
Operating the machine according to a coded program is called automatic operation. Automatic operations
are classified into operations according to tape, memory, and the MDI.
(i) Operation according to tape
CNC Machine
Tape reader
CNC tape
The machine can be operated based on a program, while the program is being loaded from the tape
reader. This is called the operation according to tape.
4
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
5
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
3) Automatic operation
(i) Program selection
Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece.
If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program num-
ber (See 5.2.1).
Work-1 program
M30
O1002 Program number
G92 - - - - -
Program number search
Work-2 program Automatic
operation
M30
O1003 Program number
G92 - - - - -
Work-3 program
M30
Stop caused
Program stop Program end
by program
6
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
7
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
Tool
Table
Workpiece
8
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
Cycle
Cycle Cycle
start
start start
Tool
Stop
b) How to view the position display change without running the machine
i) Machine lock (See Sections 6.1 and 6.2)
Tool CRT/MDI
X
Z
9
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
CRT/MDI
CNC tape
(program)
PPR
Data setting
Data display
Screen Keys
CRT/MDI Data
CNC memory
10
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
Geometric Wear
Setting compensation compensation
Tool Offset number 1 12.3 25.0
Display Tool Offset number 2 20.0 40.0
Screen Keys Tool Offset number 3
CRT/MDI
CNC memory
Machined
shape 1st tool
2nd tool
Offset value of
the 1st tool
Offset value of
the 2nd tool
11
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
Parameter
Setting
Rapid traverse rate
Position control
Display
Screen Keys Backlash compensation data
:
:
CRT/MDI
CNC memory
Operational
characteristics
Automatic
Program Machine operation
operation
Parameters
Setting Rapid traverse feedrate
Position control system
Reference position return system
Display Backlash compensation data
Screen Keys Pitch error compensation data
CRT/MDI
CNC memory
Operation properties
Automatic
Program operation Machine movement
In addition to the parameters, settings for changing the attributes of the machine are provided. The
operator can set these items if necessary while the machine is operating.
For example, the following settings are provided:
(1) Settings for the area the tool must not approach (stroke check)
(2) Settings for I/O devices
(3) Amount of return and minimum depth of cut in the canned cycle
12
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
Inputting programs
Programs
Offsets
Parameters
Tape reader Settings
CNC memory
The protection key prevents the programs, offsets, parameters, and settings from being regis-
tered, changed, or deleted by mistake.
(v) Menu switches and software operators panel (See Section 10.13).
MACHINE ON OFF
LOCK MACHINE SINGLE
SINGLE LOCK BLOCK
BLOCK ON OFF
Turn on and off some of the switches provided for the machine operators panel such as <MA-
CHINE LOCK>and <SINGLE BLOCK> switches on the CRT screen.
13
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
7) Display
Tool
Screen Keys
Tool position
CRT/MDI Data
Operating condition
Programs Operator
messages
Programs
14
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
Type of automatic
During operation using memory, MDI, or tape
operation
Type of manual During jog feed, handle feed, or incremental feed
operation
State of automatic When operation is reset, stopped, or suspended, or when searching
operation for a sequence number
x
X .
Y
y Z .
.
The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. The distance from the current
position to the target position can also be displayed.
15
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
When the system must notify the operator of necessary information during machining, the system dis-
plays the message preset in memory.
(v) Displaying alarms (See Section 11.5).
P/S
CRT screen Alarm No. (program/setting)
alarm
Servo alarm
Error codes
Meaning
Code
Memory alarm
PS000
PS133
Operator's manual
If a failure occurs while the machine is operating, the system displays the corresponding error code
and alarm message on the CRT screen.
For details of the error codes, see Appendix G in the Operators Manual (Programming).
16
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
(2) Z
(3) (4)
Z
Z
Y
Data displayed on the
Y-Z plane
X
Three-dimensional data displayed
(isometric) Y
Y
(1)
17
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
Paper tape
Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
FANUC PPR
Memory
Program
Reader/puncher FANUC FANUC cassette
Offset interface Floppy
cassette
Parameters adaptor
.
.
.
Floppy disk
Automatic
programming
system
CNC P-G
18
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Type Remarks
9 monochrome CRT/MDI (Small) Fig. 2.1 (a)
9 color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard) Fig. 2.1 (b)
10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical) Fig. 2.1 (c)
10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal) Fig. 2.1 (d)
14 color CRT/MDI (Vertical) Fig. 2.1 (e)
14 color CRT/MDI (Horizontal) Fig. 2.1 (f)
O N G
A B C 7 8 9
X Y Z 4 5 6
U V W
1 2
F D H@ ?
3
E L SP
P Q RK 0 .,
I J + #
M[ S] T( EOB =&
)
PMC
CNC
SHIFT
AUX
HELP CAN INPUT
19
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
A B C D E F G H
! / # $ % &
POWER I J
K: L M N O P< Q>
; SP ?
R S T U_ V [ W] X Y Z
( )
ON
EOB
7 8 9 HELP
SHIFT POS PROG
4 5 6 CAN
OFF
1 2 3 PAGE
0=
PAGE
AUX
+
20
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
POWER
ON
OFF
A B C D E 7 8 9 POS PROG
! / # $
F G H I J
K: 4 5 6
% &
R S
T U_ V [ W]
+
0=
PAGE
X Y Z SHIFT
EOB PAGE
( ) @ HELP
21
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
POS PROG
POWER
A B
!
EOB
C D E 7 8 9
/ # $ HELP
ON F G H 4 5 6 CAN
% &
I J
K: 1 2 3
L
;
M
SP
N
+
0=
OFF O P < Q> MMC AUX
?
R S T SHIFT
U_ V [ W]
PAGE
X Y Z PAGE
( )
22
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
POWER
A B C D E 7 8 9 POS PROG
! / # $
ON
F G H I J K: 4 5 6
% &
R S
T U_ V [ W]
+
0=
PAGE
OFF
X Y Z SHIFT
EOB PAGE
( ) @ HELP
23
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
A B C
! /
D E F G
# $ %
H I J
K:
&
L M N O
; SP ?
P < Q> R S
T U_ V [ W]
X Y Z SHIFT
( ) @
EOB
7 8 9 HELP
4 5 6 CAN
1 2 3
+
0=
MMC AUX
POS PROG
OFF ON PAGE
PAGE
24
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(23)OTHERSkey
(2)RESETkey (6)Address key (19)P-CHECKkey
A B C D E F G H
! / # $ % &
POWER I J
K: L M N O P< Q>
; SP ?
R S T U_ V [ W] X Y Z
( )
ON (17)PROG key (22)MESSAGE key
(21)SERVICE key
(20)SETTING key (18)OFFSETkey
(16)POS key
EOB
7 8 9 HELP
SHIFT POS PROG
4 5 6 CAN
OFF
1 2 3 PAGE
0=
PAGE
AUX
+
25
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
26
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
27
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
28
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
29
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
The plus sign in the rightmost frame indicates that there are other soft keys that do not fit on the CRT.
The same basic method for operating soft keys applies to both the 14 CRT/MDI panel with ten soft keys and
the 9 CRT/MDI panel with five soft keys. Obviously, it is not necessary to scroll the soft keys on the 14 CRT/
MDI panel.
When some soft keys for setting operations or operation guidance are pressed, processing is executed im-
mediately. These keys are underlined on the screen.
Underlined soft keys are displayed at higher intensity on the 9 monochrome CRT. They are displayed in green
on the 14 color CRT.
Some soft keys are displayed in parentheses on the screen.
When these soft keys are pressed, a message prompting the operator to enter the corresponding data is dis-
played.
30
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
31
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
Changing chapters
After chapters
Chapter selection key
are changed
Operation selection
(soft key)
Operation key
Not empty
<Is the key input buffer empty?>
Empty
Operation guidance
(soft key)
Key input
EXEC key
(soft key)
Execution
After execution
32
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(Hard keys)
(1) [POSITION] soft key or <POS> hard key
Press this key to select the currentposition screen.
(2) [PROGRAM] soft key or <PROG> hard key
Press this key to select the partprogram screen.
33
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
34
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(3) Offset chapter selection keys (function keys to select offset chapters)
The offset chapter selection keys are as follows:
35
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
(6) Service chapter selection keys (function keys to select service chapters)
NOTE When the operation selection key is pressed while no data is entered in the key input buffer,
the soft keys change to the operation guidance keys. The operation guidance keys are used
to display information about the current operation or the possible operations.
Enter the necessary data in the key input buffer. When the desired operation selection key is
pressed, the corresponding operation is performed. This procedure reduces the number of
times keys are pressed when the operator understands the operation without using the
operation guidance keys.
Some operations cannot be performed unless the operation guidance keys are used.
This section describes how to use the operation guidance keys.
36
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(b) Pressing the (VALUE) key displays the message prompting the operator to enter the offset data.
(c) Entering the offset data changes the soft keys as follows:
(d) Pressing the EXEC key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to the off-
set number at the cursor.
(2) When the offset data is entered in the key input buffer
(a) Pressing the INPUT key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to the
offset number at the cursor.
Pressing the EXEC key executes the operation specified for the data in the key input buffer.
For the use of the operation guidance keys, refer to the individual descriptions.
37
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
Japanese English
German French
Italian Swedish
Spanish
38
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
39
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
(4) Functions
The following functions are available:
40
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
<multiplication or division operator>: The following characters are used to indicate multiplication and
division, respectively:
* and (blank)
<unsigned integer>: <numeric character> string
<numeric character> ...
Example) 4567
<fraction part>: <numeric character> string
<numeric character> ...
Example) ...
<unsigned integer>: A decimal point is inserted between <unsigned integer> and
<fractional part>.
{<unsigned integer>}.{<fractional part>}
Example) 101.02
<function name 1>: The following character strings are used to represent the functions of sine, cosine,
tangent, square root, absolute value, inverse cosine, inverse sine, natural
logarithm, and exponent of e:
SIN, CON, TAN, SQRT, ABC, ACOS, ASIN, LN, and EXP
<function name 2>: The following character string is used to represent the inverse tangent function:
ATAN
<enclosed expression>: <expression> enclosed in square brackets [ ]
[<expression>]
<simple factor>: <unsigned number> and <enclosed expression>
Example) <unsigned number>: 12.34
Example) <enclosed expression>: [10.1 + 3.3]
<function call>: The following two types can be used:
i) Calling <function name 1>
The format is <function name 1> followed by <enclosed expression> to execute
the function of <function name 1> for <enclosed expression>.
ii) Calling <function name 2>
The format is <function name 2> followed by two <enclosed expression> units to
execute the function of <function name 2> for two divisional <enclosed
expression> units.
<function name 1><enclosed expression> and <function name 2><enclosed
expression><enclosed expression>
Example) SIN[30.0]
Example) ATAN[2.5] [5.0]
<factor>: <simple factor> and <function call>
Example) <simple factor>: [1.0 + 2.5 * 3.333]
Example) <function call>: SQRT[3.0 * 2.0]
<item>: <factor> and multiplication or division between <item> and <factor>
<factor> and <item><multiplication or division operator><factor>
Example) <factor>: ATAN[2.5] [5.0]
Example) <item><multiplication or division operator><factor>: 12.3 SIN[1.1 * 3.0]
<expression>: <item> with <sign> and addition or subtraction between <expression> and <item>
{<sign>}<item> and <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item>
Example) {<sign><item>: 2.2 * 5.1
Example) <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item>: 1.2 3.0 +
EXP[2.0]
41
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
JOG & INCREMENTAL
MEMORY
INC +X +Y +Z
EDIT JOG
CYCLE START FEED HOLD MODE SELECT RAPID
X Y Z -X -Y -Z
25 50
LOW 100
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
x10 x100
RAPID TRAVERSE x1 x1000
OVERRIDE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR
SINGLE OPTIONAL DRY RUN REFERENCE
BLOCK BLOCK SKIP RETURN
100 INCREMENTAL
OFF
DISPLAY MACHINE Y
LOCK LOCK OFF ON X Z x10 x1
42
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Function Description
CYCLE START button To start automatic operation, select an executable program
and press this button. The lamp indicating automatic
operation is on during automatic operation.
FEED HOLD button To decelerate and stop the tool, press this button during
automatic operation.
Mode selector To select the mode according to the type of job, use this
selector.
RAPID button To move the tool at the rapid traverse feedrate, press this
button.
JOG & INCREMENTAL To carry out continuous manual feed or incremental feed,
buttons press these buttons.
Handle To move the tool in the desired direction, rotate the handle.
SINGLE BLOCK switch To perform automatic operation in units of blocks, turn
this switch on.
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP To skip optional blocks, turn this switch on.
switch
DRY RUN switch To perform a dry run, turn this switch on.
REFERENCE RETURN To return the machine to the reference position, turn this
switch switch on.
RAPID TRAVERSE To apply rapid traverse override to the machine, select the
OVERRIDE selector desired override.
INCREMENTAL To select the distance to be traveled per step during
selector incremental feed, use this selector.
EMERGENCY STOP Press this button when the machine must be stopped
button immediately.
LOCK MODE selector To select the display lock or machine lock mode, use this
selector.
MANUAL/ABSOLUTE This switch specifies whether the distance to be traveled
switch during manual operation is stored in the abusolute register
when the operator manually intervenes in the automatic
mode.
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE This dial specifies the override when the feedrate is
dial overridden during automatic or manual operation.
JOG FEEDRATE dial This dial specifies the continuous manual feedrate.
HANDLE AXIS selector This selector is used to select the axis along which the
machine is moved manually with the handle.
HANDLE MULTIPLIER This selector is used to select the multiplying factor of the
selector distance traveled per graduation during manual handle feed.
43
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
Tape compartment
44
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
4 Pull the tape until the top of the tape goes past the Capstan roller.
5 Check that the NC tape is correctly positioned by the Tape Guide.
6 Lower the Light Source.
7 Turn the switch to the AUTO position.
8 Suspend the top and rearend of the tape in the Tape Box.
b) Unloading the NC tape
1 Open the front door of the tape reader.
2 Turn the switch to the RELEASE position.
3 Lift the Light Source and remove the tape.
4 Lower the Light Source.
5 Close the front door of the tape reader.
45
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
2. Optical reader
1. Light source
3. Capstan
6. Tension arm
4. Reel
4. Reel
5. Reel bose
5. Reel boss
12. REWIND
7. Control switch
button
8. AUTO lamp 11. STOP button
9. ALARM
lamp 10. FORWARD button
CNC tape
Tape compartment
46
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
47
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
48
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
AUTO 1. Watchdog
ALARM
2. Abnormal power
7 FORWARD
STOP
REWIND
10 FORWARD button This button is used to feed the tape in the tape reading direc-
tion, i.e., forward. To feed the tape forward, press the FOR-
WARD button when the AUTO lamp is off and when the control
switch is at the REEL ON or REEL OFF position. When the
button is pressed, the tape continues to be fed until it stops
under one of the following conditions:
(i) When the STOP button is pressed
(ii) When ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is read
(iii) When the RESET button is pressed on the
CRT/MDI panel
11 STOP button This button stops the tape that is currently being fed with the
FORWARD (10) or REWIND (12) button.
49
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
50
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(2) Operation
(a) When no reels are used
The procedure for operating a tape reader with the reels removed is the same as that for operating
the tape reader with no reels. However, turn the control switch to the REEL OFF position in step (7).
(b) When reels are used
(i) Setting the tape
1 Set the tape in the reel.
Operation (1)
paper tape
(iii) Set the tape in the reel.
Hub
51
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
52
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
8 Insert the tape under tape guides B. The tape is easy to insert if it is held taut.
9 Check that the tape passes under rear tape guide C as shown below:
10 Feed the tape at the left side in the same way as for the right side.
11 Wind the drawn tape leader onto the left reel and firmly roll the tape onto the reel several turns
so that the tape is secured to the reel.
53
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
12 Check that the tape is set as shown below when it is viewed from the top.
If the tape is not set as shown in the figure above, the orientation of the reel on the boss is
reversed.
13 Make sure that the tape is correctly set along the tape guides.
14 Close the light source to hold the tape.
15 Turn the control switch to the REEL ON position. The reel then rotates a little, and the tension
arm moves to tension the tape. If the reel continues to rotate, the tape is not secured to the
reel. If the lefthand reel is loose, repeat the procedure from step 11. If the righthand reel
is loose, repeat the procedure from step 5. If the reel boss continues to turn when the reel
is stopped, the reel is not firmly secured to the reel boss. In this case, repeat the procedure
from step 4.
16 Close the front door of the tape reader.
(ii) Removing the tape
1 Open the front door of the tape reader.
2 Press the REWIND button to rewind the tape. If ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is encoun-
tered, the tape stops. In this case, press the REWIND button again to rewind the whole tape.
When rewinding the tape is completed, press the STOP button to stop rewinding.
3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE position.
4 Remove the reel from the boss.
5 Close the front door of the tape reader.
54
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
4. Control
13. Reader/punch
switch
interface adapter
2. Optical 1. Light
reader source
6. Metal A
8. Winder
9. Cover lock
12. Photoamplifier
10. Lowering
Lock
lever
5. Tape box
2 Optical reader
3 Capstan See the corresponding descriptions of the tape reader without reels.
4 Control switch
Fastener
(usually kept open)
6 Metal A
Push
Insert
Paper tape
Paper tape
55
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
56
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
; ;
The program
which should be
Set the tape so that this section is under read
the glass window.
Actually, the end of block code (;) is
CR in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.
57
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
Reel unit
Paper tape punch
Printer
Switch unit
See the FANUC PPR Operators Manual (B54584E) for the FANUC PPR Operation.
58
B62564E1/02 3. POWER ON/OFF
3. POWER ON/OFF
1) Turning on the power
1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front door
and rear door are closed.)
2 Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
3 Check that some data is being displayed on the CRT screen.
4 Check that the fan motor is rotating.
CAUTION When pressing the <POWER ON> key, do not touch any other CRT/MDI panel keys.Until
the positional or alarm screen is displayed, do not touch them. Some keys are used for the
maintenance or special operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation
may be caused.
CAUTION Before connecting or disconnecting the RS232C interface cable of the I/O unit, be sure
to turn off the power to the I/O unit.
59
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
4. MANUAL OPERATION
MDI
HANDLE
MEMORY
INC
EDIT JOG
OFF ON
3 Jog Feed to reference position direction by each axis Keep this switch on until the reference position is
reached.
+X +Y +Z
X Y Z
60
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
4 The machine stops at the reference position lighting the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLE-
TION LED.
X Y Z
CAUTION For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to return the tool to reference position,
refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
NOTE 1 Once the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED lights at the completion of
reference position return, the tool does not move unless the REFERENCE POSITION
RETURN switch is turned off.
NOTE 2 The REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED is extinguished by either of the
following operations:
(i) Moving from the reference position.
(ii) Entering an emergency stop state.
61
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
+X +Y +Z
X Y Z
NOTE 1 In manual operation, up to two axes can be simultaneously operated. If three axes are
simultaneously selected by switches, only the first two of them are operated.
NOTE 2 When the mode is switched to the JOG mode while power is on, axis will not move even if it
has already been selected. Axis selection must be performed again.
0 2000
JOG
FEEDRATE
mm/min
62
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
4 Rapid traverse
To execute the rapid traverse by manual mode, push RAPID TRAVERSE button, too.
RAPID TRAVERSE
It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button is pushed.
NOTE 1 Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid
traverse are the same as G00 in programmed command.
NOTE 2 When the stored stroke limit function is provided, rapid traverse is not executed along the axis
having the reference position return function if the [rapid] button is pressed under the following
condition: When the power has already been turned on, but the reference position return
function has not been executed. In this case, the tool is moved at the jog feedrate. This
prevents the tool from reaching the stroke end while traveling at the rapid traverse feedrate and
it necessary because the stored stroke limit function is validated only after the tool is manually
returned to the reference position.
63
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
X100 X1000
X10000
X10
X100000
X1
3 Select an axis
+X +Y +Z
X Y Z
When the JOG switch is pressed once, the axis moves by the amount specified in its direction.
Then when the switch is pressed after releasing it once, the axis moves by the specified amount.
64
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
2 Select an axis.
Y
X Z
65
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
X10 (CAUTION 1)
X1 X100
Handle Multiplier
Input System
Input system X1 X10 X100(Note)
Metric input 0,001 m 0.01 mm 0.1 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.001 inch 0.01 inch
CAUTION 1 If the handle is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there is a difference between the handle
rotation amount and the machine movement distance.
CAUTION 2 Rotating the handle too fast when such as X100 is selected moves the tool or table at a rate
as fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden stop gives the machine tool a shock.
When provided, the automatic acceleration/deceleration function is executed also for
movement when using manual handle feed so that the mechanical impact is reduced.
66
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
90
0
270
NOTE 1 When the mode of manual feed in the specified direction is selected, the tool can be moved
only on the selected plane determined by the selected axes.
NOTE 2 Automatic or manual operation cannot be switched when manual feed in the specified direction
is executed.
67
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
68
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
(11)When the program terminates, the status display indicates STOP or HOLD again. The cycle start lamp
goes off. If one of the following occurs while the program is being executed, the program is stopped:
(i) Feed hold
(ii) Switching to a mode other than the manual continuous feed mode
(iii) Alarm
(iv) Reset or emergency stop
The remaining distance is canceled. The M, S, T, and B codes are retained unless the program
is stopped due to (iv).
NOTE 1 A manual numeric command can be executed whenever manual continuous feed is allowed.
It can be executed even if the feed hold function or another function stops the program
(automatic operation stop state) in the middle of a block. In this case, however, the command
is subjected to the following restrictions:
(i) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, the manual numeric command including
the M, S, T, or B code cannot be executed.
(ii) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, no manual numeric commands can be
specified in the following case: When the M, S, T, or B code was independently specified.
Alternatively, another function (move command, dwell command, etc.) specified in the
block containing the M, S, T, or B code has already been executed.
NOTE 2 The M, S, T, or B code cannot be used to call a subprogram or custom macro.
NOTE 3 The S code cannot be specified in the constant surface speed control mode.
69
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
Y axis
P2
Manual
operation
P1
0 Z axis
Y1 Y2
P2
O2 P1
X2
O1 X1
Y
(120.0 , 200.0)
(220.0 , 250.0)
70
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
b) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (Yaxis +
75.0) is performed, and the cycle start button is pressed and released
(200.0 , 225.0)
(150.0 , 200.0)
When the absolute switch is on
Manual operation (300.0 , 200.0)
(200.0 , 150.0)
(150.0 , 125.0)
c) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (Xaxis
+75.0) is performed, the control unit is reset with the RESET button, and block (2) is read again
(300.0 , 275.0)
(200.0 , 225.0)
(200.0 , 150.0)
(200.0 , 125.0)
(100.0 , 100.0)
d) When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded axis returns.
N1G01G90X100.0Y100.0F500 ;
N2X200.0 ;
N3Y150.0 ;
Manual operation
N3
When the switch is off
N2
N1
71
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
e) When the tape commands are followed by an incremental command, they are executed in the same
manner as when the absolute switch is off.
CAUTION When the operator manually intervenes during cutter compensation, the tool moves as
described below:
1) Coordinates when the switch off and cutter compensation is being performed
Manual
operation
Cutter path
Program path
After manual operation is performed in the status of manual absolute switch is off, during cutter com-
pensation, automatic operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would
have been performed if manual movement had not been performed. The amount of separation equals
to the amount that was performed manually.
2) When the switch is on during cutter compensation
Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention in the status
of manual absolute switch is on, during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter
compensation mode will be described. The center of the tool is directly moved to the top of the vector
at the beginning of the next block. After that point, the distance of manual movement is taken into con-
sideration when the vector is calculated. The same occurs when manual intervention is executed
while turning a corner.
If the INC bit in parameter No. 2402 is set to 1 when the program does not contain absolute commands
but incremental commands, the tool is moved in the same manner as when the switch is off. If the INC
bit is set to 0, even the incremental command is processed like the absolute command as described
below.
(a) When the operator manually intervenes while a block is being executed
VB2 VC1
PH
Manual operation
PH'
72
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
VB2 VC1
VB1 VC2
PB PC
After the operator manually intervenes
white turning a corner in cutter compensation,
the tool moves along a path so that the
center of the tool moves straight to the
top of the next vector in the program, as
PA described in Example 1 above.
PH
VA2 VA1
Manual operation
PH'VA1'
(b) When the operator manually intervanes affer a block is terminated by the signal block function.
VB2 VC1
VB1 VC2
Manual PB PC
operation
73
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
(1)
74
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
When the handle interrupt is made in the longitudinal direction of the tool, the pulses are distributed to the axes
as described below:
75
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
Xp = Hp SIN( B ) COS( C )
Yp = Hp SIN( B ) SIN( C )
Zp = Hp COS( B )
If C is set to 0 (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows:
Yp = Hp SIN( B )
Zp = Hp COS( B )
(2) A and Caxes
Xp = Hp SIN( A ) SIN( C )
Yp = Hp SIN( A ) COS( C )
Zp = Hp COS( A )
If C is set to 0 (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows:
Yp = Hp SIN( A )
Zp = Hp COS( A )
76
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
Xp = Hp SIN( B )
Yp = Hp COS( B ) SIN( A )
Zp = Hp COS( B ) COS( A )
The pulses are distributed as described above.
Xp = Hp COS( A ) SIN( B )
Yp = Hp SIN( A )
Zp = Hp COS( A ) COS( B )
The pulses are distributed as described above.
77
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
(4) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)
Xp = Hp COS( B )
Yp = Hp SIN( B ) SIN( A )
Zp = Hp SIN( B ) COS( A )
The pulses are distributed as described above.
78
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
A- and C- axes
B- and C- axes
Center of rotation
Tool
A&C , B&C
C
Transverse direction
of the tool(X-axis) Longitudinal direction
of the tool
Y
Transverse direction B
A
of the tool(Y-axis) X
Workpiece
When handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is executed, the pulses are distributed as described
below:
79
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
<X direction> Z
Xp 0'
Zp
X
Hp (X direction)
B
C
X' C
Yp 0
Hpxy
Xp = Hp COS( B ) COS( C )
Yp = Hp COS( B ) SIN( C )
Zp = Hp SIN( B )
The pulses are distributed as described above.
<Y direction>
X 0
C The XY plane is drawn because B- and
C-axes are specified and because rotation
about the B-axis, which is on the Y-axis,
Xp does not cause the tool to rotate about the
Y-axis at the tool tip. Suppose that the
0' Z-axis on this side of the XY plane is
positive.
Hp (Y direction)
Yp
C
Y' Y
Xp = Hp SIN( C )
Yp = Hp COS( C )
Zp = 0
The pulses are distributed as described above.
80
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
<X direction> 0 Y
X' X
Xp = Hp COS( C )
Yp = Hp SIN( C )
Zp = 0
The pulses are distributed as described above.
<Y direction> Z
Hp (Y direction)
Hpxy
A Zp
Yp
Xp
X Y
Xp = Hp COS( A ) SIN( C )
Yp = Hp COS( A ) COS( C )
Zp = Hp SIN( A )
The pulses are distributed as described above.
81
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
(3) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)
Z(+)
Z'(+)
Hp
A
Zz
X'(+)
B
Feed in the Y direction 0' Xz
Yz
Hp
Zy
X(+)
A
Yy
Y(+)
Y'(+)
When the tool is moved in the Y direction, the pulses are distributed as follows:
Xy = 0
Yy = Hp COS( A )
Zy = Hp SIN( A )
When the tool is moved in the Z direction, the pulses are distributed as follows:
Xz = Hp SIN( B )
Yz = Hp COS( B ) SIN( A )
Zz = Hp COS( B ) COS( A )
82
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
4.9.3 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip
Select the mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip and rotate the handle of the manual
pulse generator. When the rotation axis (A, B, or Caxis) is moved, the X, Y, and Zaxes are adjusted
so that the movement of the rotation axis does not shift the tool tip.
If this mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, rotation around the center
of the tool tip by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.
When the tool is rotated around the center of its tip, the traveled distance along linear axes (Xp, Yp, Zp) obtained
by the following expressions are output at the time the movement about the rotation axes is output. The tool
tip hardly moves. When rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed, the pulses are dis-
tributed to the axes as described below:
CAUTION If the tool rotates about the rotation axes at high speed, the tool tip may move.
83
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
84
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
(3) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal axis of the tool is in the X direction)
(A+Ap) , (B+Bp)
Z(+)
Rotation around the center of the tool tip, handle
interrupt, or handle feed
Zp
Pe
Ps
Ze
A, B Xe
Yp
Xp Ye
Ap,
Bp
Zs
L=Distance between tool tip position
X(+)
Ys
Xs
Y(+)
85
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
4.9.4 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool
Select the mode of changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of tool when both the
following modes are selected: Mode of tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool (G43.1)
and mode of manual handle interrupt (MOVL and H are on). Then rotate the handle of the manual pulse genera-
tor. The tool length compensation is changed in the longitudinal direction of the tool.
The change is cleared to zero when a reset or the G49 command is executed or when the offset number is
changed.
4.9.5 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal
direction of the tool
When this function is specified to perform tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, a
parameterset offset is added to the conventional tool compensation value and the sum is assumed as the tool
length to be used for compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool.
This function enables the user to separately specify the actual tool length and the machinespecific length be-
tween the center of rotation of the rotation axis and the position at which the tool is attached. The user need
not add the two lengths to specify a compensation value.
Do not change the value of the offset parameter (No. 7548) in the mode of tool length compensation in the longi-
tudinal direction of the tool. To change the value, first cancel the mode of tool length compensation in the longi-
tudinal direction of the tool.
Setting parameters DTHO and ETHO (No. 7540) to 1 enables the following:
1 With the function for specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction
of the tool, the tool tip coordinates are displayed according to the machine specific length, set with parame-
ter No. 7548.
2 The tool holder offset function can also be used for the tool length compensation function (G43), as well
as for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool.
86
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
A- and C-axes
B- and C-axes
Center of rotation
Tool
A&C , B&C Z
C
Longitudinal
direction of the tool
Y
B
A
X
Workpiece
A- and B-axes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)
A
B
Workpiece
Center of rotation
X
A
Tool
B
Longitudinal Y
direction of the tool
87
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
6) If the HLB bit does not specify the A and C axes when the A and Caxes are selected, PLS alarm No.
011 occurs. The alarm occurs if the same applies to the B and Caxes or the A and Baxes.
7) The pulses of the first manual pulse generator are used.
The mode of threedimensional handle feed is validated when the following two conditions are satisfied:
The axis selected for the corresponding threedimensional handle feed mode is input in the manual handle
feed axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator. The corresponding handle mode signal
(G156.0 to G156.3) is input.
8) The machine coordinates of rotation axes A, B, and C are read when the mode of handle feed in the longitu-
dinal direction of the tool or the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is selected. If
the rotation axis is moved after either handle feed mode is selected, the new machine coordinates are ig-
nored.
9) When the function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool is
executed, the new tool length compensation becomes valid for the blocks read into the buffer.
88
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
Baxis master
Xd = X L COS( A ) SIN( B )
Xd = Y + L SIN( A )
Zd = Z L COS( A ) COS( B )
The tool tip position is calculated as shown above.
A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)
Xd = X L COS( B )
Xd = Y L SIN( B ) SIN( A )
Zd = Z + L SIN( B ) COS( A )
where
Xd, Yd, Zd : Tool tip position
X, Y, Z : Current position along the axes (workpiece coordinate)
A, B, C : Current position from the origin of the workpiece coordinate system of the A, B, and
Caxes
L : Specified tool length
(2) Display formats
(a) On the 9inch CRT (b) On the 14inch CRT
TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001 TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001
(ABSOLUTE) (ABSOLUTE)
X 123.456 (MM) X 123.456 (MM)
Y 234.567 (MM) Y 234.567 (MM)
Z 56.789 (MM) Z 56.789 (MM)
B 78.898 (DEG.) B 78.901 (DEG.)
C 21.893 (DEG.) C 21.893 (DEG.)
F 15 S 0
(MM/MIN) (PRM)
TOOL HANDLE
TL_HEAD HDL_PLS HEAD PULSE
4.9.8 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance
The total number of pulses in handle interrupt and the total traveled distances along individual axes can be
displayed when the handle feed in the longitudinal or transverse direction of the tool, or the rotational handle
feed around the center of the tool tip is executed. Even in the manual handle interrupt mode, the number of
pulses and the distances are displayed in the same manner.
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1, the pulses generated by a threedimensional handle interrupt
are not counted to update the displayed number of manual interrupt pulses.
The number of manual interrupt pulses (No. 4101) displayed on the diagnosis screen (coordinate system shift)
is, however, updated even if bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1.
The screen displaying the number of pulses in the handle interrupt and traveled distances along individual axes
can be selected in the following two ways:
(a) Pressing the [FUNCTION SELECTION] key
Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys. Press
the [POSITION] key of the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys, then select the screen displaying the num-
ber of pulses and the traveled distances along individual axes.
(b) Pressing the [CHAPTER SELECTION] key
Press the [function menu] key and select the position screen with the soft key. Press the [OPERATION
SELECTION] key on the position screen to switch the soft keys to the [CHAPTER SELECTION] keys.
Select the display of the number of pulses and traveled distances along individual axes.
89
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001 TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001
(PULSE) (DISTANCE) (PULSE) (DISTANCE)
X 0.000 X 1.234 X 0.000 X 1.234
Y 0.000 Y 2.098 Y 0.000 Y 2.098
Z 1.215 Z 3.789 Z 1.215 Z 3.789
B 0.000 B 4.123 B 0.000 B 4.123
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
(TOOL)
TOOL : 0.789 L 0.789
ACT.F : 15 (MM/MIN) S 0 (PRM)
(ACTUAL SPEED)
F 15 S 0
(MM/MIN) (PRM)
TOOL HANDLE
TL_HEAD HDL_PLS HEAD PULSE
NOTE In the column of the number of pulses, the value next to axis X, Y, Z, B (or A), or C (or B) does
not indicate the number of pulses in the handle interrupt for each axis.
The indicated value depends on the special handle function as described below.
The axis in square brackets indicates the feed direction when the longitudinal direction of the
tool is in the X direction and the rotation axes are the A and Baxes.
1 Handle feed in the X [Y] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool:
The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the first axis.
2 Handle feed in the Y [Z] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool:
The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the second axis.
3 Mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number of pulses in the handle
interrupt is indicated next to the third axis.
4 Handle feed around the A and Baxes [Baxis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around the
center of the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fourth
axis.
5 Handle feed around the Caxis [Aaxis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around the center
of the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fifth axis.
6 Changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number of
pulses in the handle interrupt (tool length compensation) is indicated next to L or T00L. (This is
indicated at the time the compensation is validated.)
90
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
Z Z
Z'
Y Y
X'
Y'
X X
4.10.1 Interruption
This function performs interruption only when all the conditions in 1 to 8 are met.
1 During simultaneous manual and automatic operation mode (including manual interruption using the
manual pulse generator)
2 During threedimensional coordinate conversion (i.e. while blocks G68 to G69 are being executed.)
3 During cutting mode (i.e. while blocks from a G code for cutting, such as G01, G02, or G03, to G00 are being
executed.)
4 When parking along the feed axis is not enabled (i.e. when PKn for the feed axis is low.)
5 When the machine moves along the three axes selected for threedimensional coordinate conversion
6 When the axis for which the function performs interruption is a master axis under parallel axis control (in
this case, no slave axes are converted).
7 When feed in the tool axis direction or the direction perpendicular to the tool axis or rotation around the tool
tip center is not selected for the manual operation or the manual interruption using the manual pulse gener-
ator when the ALNGH, RGHTH, and RNDH input signals are all low.
8 While the playback function is not being executed
The result of adding the feedrate in the threedimensional coordinate conversion mode is not permitted to ex-
ceed the maximum cutting speed for each axis.
91
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
92
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.
93
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
step 6.
(2) Editing the program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode
The program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode can be edited in the same way as for the
program stored in CNC memory.
The following editing is possible:
(a) Forward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.)
(b) Backward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.)
(c) Word change (See Subsection 9.4.2.)
(d) Word insertion (See Subsection 9.4.2.)
(e) Word deletion (See Subsection 9.4.2.)
(f) Program rewinding (See Subsection 5.2.2.)
94
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
1 To perform the operation in the MEMORY mode, set the mode selector to the MEMORY position.
To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the TAPE position.
Only searching for a sequence number is possible during the operation in the TAPE mode. Searching
for a program number is impossible.
2 Press the function menu key.
3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.
4 When the program screen is not a program text screen
(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the
[TEXT] key.
or
(ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed.
5 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
6 Press the [FORE SEARCH] key.
7 (i) To search for a program number, 9" CRT function selection keys
press the [(PROG#)]key to enter 0 POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +
in the key inputbuffer. Then, the
system prompts the operator to
enter the number of the program to 9" CRT operation selection keys
be searched for. ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_WRD BG_EDIT +
95
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
96
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
97
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
NOTE 1 To maintain the operational compatibility between Series 15B and conventional CNCs or
suchlike if there is no need to execute small blocks at high speed, specify 1 as the number of
blocks to be buffered by setting XBUF to 0.
NOTE 2 After changing the setting of XBUF in parameter No. 7616, be sure to turn the power off, then
on.
NOTE 3 When the multibuffer option is provided, the multibuffer function overrides this buffering
function, rendering this function ineffective.
NOTE 4 The block of a canned cycle, cutter compensation C, or suchlike is also regarded as a single
block.
98
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
When pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cycle start lamp turns off.
Turns off
Cycle start
At this time,
i) Feeding stops if the tool is moving.
ii) Dwell execution stops, if executing.
iii) M, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.
99
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
5.5.5 Reset
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state by using reset button on
the CRT/MDI panel or external reset signal. When reset operation is applied to the system during a tool moving
status, the motion is slowed down then stops.
100
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Example 2
The canned cycle is counted as three blocks. Macro statements are not counted as blocks.
101
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
102
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
103
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
(a) When the power is turned on, all the necessary operations including reference position return
are performed.
(b) Manually move the tool to the program start point, that is, the machining start point. This operation
sets the same continuousstate data and coordinate system as those when machining started.
(c) Specify or change the offset if necessary.
(d) Set the program restart switch on the machine operators panel to the on position.
(e) Search for the beginning of the program.
(i) In the MEMORY mode
1 Set the mode selector to the MEMORY position.
2 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.
Then, press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.
3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the function operation keys.
Then, press the [REWIND] soft key.
(ii) To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, position the tape in the tape reader at the begin-
ning and set the mode selector to the TAPE position.
(f) Switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys for the program screen. Then, press the
[RESTART P] operation selection key.
(g) Specify the block at which machining is to be restarted.
(i) Specifying the block by its sequence number
1 Press the [QSQ#] soft key and enter the sequence number of the block at which ma
chining is to be restarted, the program number, and the number of times the block is to
be executed with numeric keys.
2 Press the [EXEC] soft key to search for the block having the specified sequence number.
When the same sequence number is used many times or when it is desired to search
for the block with a specific sequence number in a program, specify the block with the
sequence number in the following way. To search for a subprogram to be called several
times for the block with the desired sequence number, specify the desired number of
times the subprogram is called, enter a comma (,), specify the sequence number, enter
another comma, then specify the desired program number beginning with O. To search
for the block with sequence number 999 when the subprogram is called five times from
program 1000, for example, enter Q5,999,O1000, then press the EXEC soft key.
Q5,999,O1000[EXEC]
The desired number of times the subprogram is called and/or program number can be
omitted when the number is 1 and/or when it is not necessary to specify a program num-
ber.
(i) Sequence number only
Q999[EXEC]
(ii) Sequence number and the desired number of times the subprogram is called
Q5,999[EXEC]
(iii) Sequence number and program number
Q999,O1000[EXEC]
(iv) Sequence number, the number of times the subprogram is called, and program number
Q5,999,O1000[EXEC]
(ii) Specifying the block by the block number
1 Press the [QBK#] soft key and the number of the block at which machining is to be re-
started with numeric keys. To specify the 100th block, for example, enter 100.
QB100[EXEC]
2 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Then, the block with the specified block number is searched
for.
(h) When the desired block has been found, the CRT screen changes to the screen for restarting a
program.
(i) Turn off the program restart switch.
104
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(j) If the M, S, T, and/or B codes that are to be output are displayed on the screen, set the mode selec-
tor to the MDI position and output the codes from the MDI. In this case, the codes are not displayed
on the program restart screen.
(k) For operation in the MEMORY or TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the desired position.
When the distance displayed in the REMAINING DISTANCE field is correct or when the tool is
moved to the position where machining is restarted, check that there is no danger of the tool bump-
ing into the workpiece or anything. If there is such a danger, manually move the tool to a safe posi-
tion then press the [CYCLE START] button. The tool then moves to the machining restart position
in the dry run mode along each axis in the order of axes specified in parameter No. 7110 then re-
starts machining.
CAUTION In general, the tool cannot be returned to the correct position if one of the conditions occurs:
(i) The tool is manually moved when the manual absolute mode is ineffective.
(ii) The tool is moved in the machine lock state without considering the movement along the
Zaxis.
(iii) The mirror image function is used.
(iv) No coordinate system is specified at the beginning of the program during incremental
programming.
(v) The tool is manually moved while it is being automatically returned along the axes.
(vi) The machine lock state is released after the command for restarting the program is
issued in that state.
(vii) Restarting the program is specified in a block between the block for skip cutting and the
subsequent absolute command block.
(viii)The coordinate system is set, changed, or shifted after the block is searched for.
In the case of (iii), the tool can be returned by a block in the program of type P if the block
follows the last block for specifying whether the mirror image function is effective. In this
case, the mirror image signal must be kept in the same state as when the interruption
occurred.
Care must be taken because no alarm occurs under any of the above conditions.
105
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
NOTE 8 After the command for restarting the program is issued, the character string PRSR is displayed
at the bottom of the CRT screen while the tool is being returned along the last axis.
NOTE 9 Notes on restarting the program for which macro variables are used:
(i) Common variables
The previously specified values are used as the common variables when restarting the
program. The variables are not automatically preset. The necessary common variables
are therefore initialized to the values used for the previous automatic operation
immediately before the program is restarted.
(ii) DI/DO
While the program is restarted, DI data can be read from the corresponding system
variables, but DO data cannot be output.
(iii) Clock
While the program is restarted, the clock time can be checked with the system variable,
but the time cannot be preset.
(iv) Tool offset and offset from the workpiece reference point
While the program is being restarted, offsets can be read from the corresponding system
variables, but offsets cannot be changed except for programs of type Q.
NOTE 10 When the program specifies machining at high speed
When a program contains a block for highspeed machining, the program cannot be restarted
from the block. However, the program can be restarted from any block other than one for
highspeed machining.
NOTE 11 The number of blocks is not lost when the power is turned off.
The recorded number of blocks is cleared when the [CYCLE START] button is pressed after
the system is reset. The number of blocks is recorded every 60 seconds during automatic
operation.
NOTE 12 The number related to blocks displayed on the program screen indicates the number of block
currently being executed. However, in the following cases, the number of blocks which have
been executed is displayed:
When all of the blocks have been executed
When the system is reset
When the singleblock stop button is pressed
In other words, the number related to the blocks is displayed as follows when the CNC program
is stopped or suspended under to the conditions below:
When the [FEED HOLD] button is pressed, the number of block currently being executed
is displayed.
When the system is reset, the number of executed blocks is displayed.
When the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch is turned on, the number of executed blocks is
displayed.
When the system is reset while block 10 is being executed, for example, the currently displayed
number of blocks are changed from 10 to 9.
NOTE 13 Suppose the operator manually intervenes in system operation from the MDI panel after
turning on the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch during program execution. The number of issued CNC
command blocks is added to the number of blocks.
106
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Only the S code specified last is displayed on the program restart screen regardless of whether it is
in the same block as a G92.
2 While searching for the block to be restarted, the program restart function automatically outputs all the
sampled M codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC. The function can sample up to 35 M
codes. When the number of M codes sampled exceeds 35, the function outputs the latest 35 M codes
to the PMC.
Specify whether the function performs operation 1 or 2 with the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620).
(2) Before the machining restart position is reached.
On the program restart screen, M, S, and B codes can be specified from the MDI for output to the PMC
while the system is still in the MEM or TAPE mode.
Outputting the last M, S, T, and B codes
When the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block to
be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs the last
M, S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position.
In the single block stop state, press the cycle start button again after the program restart function outputs the
last M, S, T, and B codes. The tool then starts moving to the machining restart position.
Outputting all the M codes and the last S, T, and B codes
When the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block to
be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs all the
M codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position.
Example When M10, M11, M12, M13, M14, T0101, S1000, and B10 are already sampled: The pro-
gram restart function outputs these codes in the following program format before moving the
tool to the machining restart position:
M10 T0101 S1000 B10 ;
M11 ;
M12 ;
M13 ;
M14 ;
Outputting the M, S, B codes on the program restart screen
When the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, enter M, S, and B codes from the MDI in the MEM or TAPE
mode until the tool completes moving to the machining restart position after searching for the block to be re-
started with the program restart function. The program restart function then outputs these codes to the PMC.
[Operation]
1 Search for the block to be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart screen is dis-
played. On this screen, the operation soft keys OVRSTR and CLEAR are displayed for the 9inch CRT,
and OVERSTORE and CLEAR are displayed for the 14inch CRT.
107
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
To set the overstore mode while the tool is moving to the machining restart position, temporarily stop the
restart operation with the feed hold function, then press the OVRSTR soft key.
Enter the M, S, and B codes to be output in the overstore field from the MDI. On this screen, plus (+) and
minus () signs are not displayed if they are entered.
Example To enter M10, S1000, and B20 in the overstore field
Enter M10 from the MDI.
Press the INPUT key.
Enter S1000 from the MDI.
Press the INPUT key.
Enter B20 from the MDI.
Press the INPUT key.
NOTE 1 When M, S, B codes are entered and output to the PMC in the overstore mode, these codes
are not displayed on the program restart screen.
NOTE 2 When the operation mode is changed to a mode other than the MEM or TAPE mode in the
overstore mode, the overstore mode is not canceled, but no code can be entered in the
overstore field.
108
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(2) Stop automatic operation by The block restart function cannot be used if the reset or
pushing the feed hold button emergency button has been pressed and the system has
or switching the mode. entered the reset state.
(5) Turn on the block return switch The message RSTR blinks at
in the continuous manual mode. the bottom of the screen.
Of the above operations, the following operations apply only to the restart function:
(6)2 Manual operation with the block return switch turned on
(8) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on
109
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
(DESTINATION) (ABSOLUTE)
X 100.000 X 0.000
Y 200.000 Y 100.000
Z 100.000 Z 200.000
A 200.000 A 100.000
B 0.000 B 200.000
(i) (DESTINATION): Absolute coordinates of the tool center at the start point of the interrupted block
(ii) (DISTANCE TO GO): Distance from the current position (ABSOLUTE) of the tool to the start point
(DESTINATION) of the interrupted block
110
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
CAUTION When returning the tool to the start point of the block by a manual operation using the block
restart function, the tool is returned to the tip of the vector vertical to the block at its start point.
Therefore, if the start point of the interrupted block is inside the corner, the workpiece may
be cut when the tool returns to the start point.
Manual operation
Automatic operation is
Programmed path
When the tool moves to the The tool should be returned
start point, it may cut the manually to an arbitrary
workpiece. point in the block.
In this case, return the the tool to an appropriate position while watching it, rather than to the
start point.
111
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
NOTE If the tool movement is interrupted during a canned drilling cycle and is restarted, the tool
always returns to the positioning point, regardless of whether the current mode is the initial level
return (G98) mode or pointR level return (G99) mode.
Point R
Point of interruption
Point Z
On the second or subsequent drilling cycle, the tool returns to either of the following two
positions according to the G98 or G99 mode.
Initial point
Point returned to by the
block restart function
Point R Point R
Point Z Point Z
For initial level return For Point-R level return
(G98 mode) (G99 mode)
112
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(b) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on
If the cycle start button is pressed while the block return switch is on, the tool length compensation
value and the cutter compensation value are recalculated, and automatic operation is restarted toward
the compensated end point from the current position.
The tool moves toward the recalculated end point from its current position regardless of whether it has been
returned to the start point of or an arbitrary point in the interrupted block prior to pushing the cycle start button.
CAUTION The tool may cut the workpiece when it is being moved toward the end point of the
interrupted block. In this case, an alarm is displayed and the the tool is inhibited from moving
to the end point. This function is referred to as the block restart interference check.
Manual operation
The workpiece will be cut when
automatic operation is restarted
Programmed path
Tool center path
If the tool will cut the workpiece when automatic operation is restarted, press the cancel key to reset the alarm.
Then move the tool to a proper position manually while watching it, and perform the restart operation again.
The block restart interference check is performed based on the value that is set in parameter No. 7651 (d: error
limit at the start of block restart). If the distance between the normal path and the point where the block is re-
started is d or longer, an interference check alarm is issued.
113
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
The block restart interference check function can be enabled and disabled using bit 7 of parameter No. 7605.
However, the interference check is not performed in the following cases even if it has been enabled:
When the tool is moved manually to the start point of the interrupted block while the block return switch
is on.
When the interrupted automatic operation is restarted with the cutter compensation mode canceled.
When no vector is available for cutter compensation at the start point of the block in which the tool move-
ment was interrupted. (Start up of cutter compensation)
(2) Notes on the block restart function
(a) The command for automatic reference point return (G28 and G30) in the cutter compensation mode
does not return the tool to the correct position even when the restart operation is performed within the
block.
(b) The restart operation cannot be performed in the block for which a dwell (G04) has been specified.
(c) The compensation value must be set prior to turning on the block return switch.
(d) In the threedimensional cutter compensation mode with zero value, suppose the tool movement is
interrupted, the compensation value is changed, and the operation is restarted. In this case, the vector
for the cutter compensation is not recalculated.
Note that if the compensation values are changed excessively, the accuracy for vector calculation may
deteriorate.
(e) When the block return switch is on, if the message RSTR does not appear on the CRT screen, the
cycle start command is ignored.
(f) Operating the block return switch during continuous manual feed stops the tool.
(g) Operation must not be restarted in a block without a move command.
(h) After a singleblock is stopped, operation is restarted at the block after the block that has already been
executed by the singleblock function.
114
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
115
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
(Sample program)
N10 G91 Z-50. ;
N20 G10.6 Z-50. ;
N10 N30 G01 X150. F500. ;
N30
116
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
2 When block N30 is being executed, turn on the TOOL RETRACT switch on the machine operations
panel at point A, for example.
A TOOL TOOL
RETRACT RECOVER
N30
3 When the machine enters the tool retraction mode, the TOOL RETRACTING lamp on the machine
operators panel comes on. At the same time, automatic operation is held and the tool is retracted by
the distance specified by program. If point A is the end of the block, the tool is retracted after automatic
operation is stopped.
The retraction operation is interpolated linearly and executed at the dry run speed.
When the tool has been retracted, the RETRACT POSITION lamp on the machine operators panel
comes.
TOOL TOOL
A RETRACT RECOVER
N30
117
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
If retraction is not specified by G10.6, the tool is not retracted, execution of the block in the automatic
mode is suspended, and automatic operation is held or stopped.
If the single block switch is turned on during the start of automatic operation or if the TOOL RETRACT
switch is turned on after a feed hold to hold or stop automatic operation, the tool is retracted and the
machine returns to the automatic operation hold or stop state after the completion of retraction.
During retraction, feed hold is disabled. The RESET switch is effective, and retraction is stopped im-
mediately when the RESET switch is pressed. If an alarm occurs during the retraction, retraction is
stopped immediately.
It is possible to shift from the retract end state to step 6 (repositioning) without retracting or recovering
the tool.
4 Enter the manual mode. Either jog feed, incremental feed, handle feed, and manual numeric value
command is possible in this mode. (Manual arbitraryangle feed is impossible.)
5 Manually move the tool along an axis. This operation is called manual retraction. Be sure to select
only one axis for this operation. Do not issue a signal for two or more axes at one time.
NOTE Simultaneous automatic/manual operations are impossible in the tool retraction mode. If they
are selected, manual operation such as jog feed, incremental feed, or handle feed is not
performed in the tool retraction mode.
In the tool retraction mode, if an attempt is made to move the tool along two or more axes at
one time using a manual numeric value command, P/S alarm No. 183 is issued.
118
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
6 If each axis is specified by manual operation, the control unit stores up to ten positions on the traced
route.
When another axis is specified after one axis is specified, the position where the axes are switched
is stored. Up to ten such positions are stored. Subsequent positions are discarded.
Resetting the machine deletes the stored position data and cancels the retraction mode.
7 When the retraction ends and the tool is replaced, it is necessary to return the tool to the original re-
tracted position.
First return to the automatic mode. Then, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch on the machine opera-
tors panel, and turn it off again. The tool then returns to the original retracted position at the dry run
speed, irrespective of whether the dry run switch is on or off.
During recovery, the following displays appear:
(i) PTRR blinks at the location where otherwise
ACTUAL POSITION
the automatic mode is indicated.
(RELATIVE COORDINATES)
(ii) ***is
displayed at the location where other-
X 207.438MM
Y 402.083MM wise the manual mode is indicated.
Z 133.561MM (iii) MSTR is displayed at the location where
(i) (ii) (iii) otherwise the automatic operation state is in-
PTRR* * *MSTR dicated.
If the path along which the tool is retracted exceeds 10 positions, the tool first moves to the 10th posi-
tion, then sequentially to the 9th and 8th and so on, and finally returns to the original position.
119
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
During recovery, the single block switch is effective. Keeping the switch in the off position enables the
recovery operation to continue. Keeping it in the on position causes the tool to stop at each stored
position. To resume recovery, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch, then turn it off.
If an alarm condition occurs during recovery, the tool stops. During recovery, feed hold is ineffective.
When the tool has returned to the original retracted position, the RETRACT LAMP is lit.
8 When cycle is started while the tool remains in the retracted position (point E in the following figure),
that is while the RETRACT POSITION lamp is on, the tool returns to the position from which it was
retracted, that is, the position where the TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on. This operation is
called repositioning. During repositioning, feed hold is effective.
120
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The operation to be performed after repositioning depends on the automatic operation state when the
TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on.
(i) During the start of automatic operation
After repositioning, execution of the interrupted block is resumed. Namely, the remaining part of
block N30 is executed.
NOTE Bit 1 (TRS) of parameter No. 7614 can be set so that if the single block switch is on, the tool
stops immediately when repositioning is completed and the remaining part of block N30 is
executed when the cycle is started once again.
X 01234
D N4 A N0 G10.6 X40. ;
N1 G91 G00 X-50. ;
N3 N1 N2 G33 Z-100. ;
Z N3 G00 X50.;
N4 Z100. ;
M02 ;
C N2 B
2 Let us assume that while thread cutting programmed in block N2 is being executed, the TOOL RE-
TRACT switch is turned on.
C N2 F B
TOOL TOOL
RETRACT RECOVER
121
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
If the program specifies the axis along which the thread is cut as the retraction axis, the tool is not re-
tracted irrespective of whether the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on. In addition, P/S alarm No.
215, ESCAPE ERROR (PTRR), is issued after the tool stops at the position where a block other than
the thread cutting block terminates.
4 After retraction is completed, the tool stops after the next block, not the thread cutting block, is
executed.
122
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5 The tool is repositioned so that it comes back to the thread cutting end position (point D in the following
figure) specified by the program.
N4
D
Motion 2 Motion 6
Point R
Motion 3 Motion 5
Motion 4
(i) If the switch is turned on during motion 1, the tool is moved retracted by the distance specified by
G10.6, as in ordinary retraction.
(ii) If the switch is turned on during motion 2, the motion is suspended and the tool moves to the initial
point and stops there.
(iii) If the switch is turned on during motion 3, the motion is suspended, cycle motions 4, 5, and 6 are
executed from that position. After motion 6, the tool stops at the initial point.
123
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
(iv) If the switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6, the motion is continued until the tool reaches
the initial point.
During motions 2 to 6, turning on the TOOL RETRACT switch does not retract the tool as specified
by G10.6. However, when the switch is turned on and the tool reaches the initial point, the ma-
chine enters the tool retraction mode.
When the canned cycle is in its second or subsequent operation, if the switch is turned on during
motions 2 to 6, the retraction position differs according to G98 or G99.
G98 (initial level return): The tool moves to the initial level.
G99 (pointR level return): The tool moves to point R.
2 A canned repositioning cycle is performed by starting the cycle at the retraction position.
(i) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 1
As in ordinary repositioning, automatic operation is resumed after completion of repositioning.
(ii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 2
Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2.
(iii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 3
Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2.
(iv) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6
Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2 with the same hole position.
124
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(d) Combining the block restart function and the retraction and recovery function
The procedure for combining the tool retraction and recovery and block restart functions is shown follow-
ing. See Item 5.6.2 for the block restart function.
If the tool breaks, for example, after automatic operation is suspended, the tool is replaced, and the offset
value is changed, the operation is resumed from the start point of or an intermediate point in the interrupted
block.
Move the tool manually and replace the tool or take an appropri
(3) ate action.
(6) Return to the automatic mode and turn on the block return switch.
When the block return switch is on, executing the block can be
resumed by restarting it at an arbitrary position. The position may
not always be the retraction position.
(7) Start the cycle with the block return switch turned on.
125
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
Cautions and Note on use of the tool retraction and recovery function
CAUTION 1 The retraction axis specified by G10.6 and the distance the tool is retracted need to be
changed in the necessary block according to the figure to be machined. If correct retraction
is not specified, the tool or the workpiece may be damaged.
CAUTION 2 If the origin, preset, and work offset are changed after the retraction position is specified by
an absolute G10.6 command, the retraction position does not change. After the operation
or the work offset is changed, specify the retraction position again using G10.6.
CAUTION 3 When retracting the tool by manual operation in the tool retraction mode, do not use the
machine lock or mirror image function.
NOTE The manual numeric value command option is necessary for tool retraction.
5.6.5 Retrace
The retrace function enables the tool to retrace the path of movement so far. It also returns the tool along the
same path once again. When the tool returns to the point where it started retracing its path, it continues machin-
ing as directed by program.
The retrace function can be triggered by the trace switch on the machine operators panel. It can also be auto-
matically triggered (without the operators intervention) when a damaged tool is detected. Refer to the appropri-
ate manual issued by the machine builder to check what conditions cause the tool to retrace its path and to
return to the machining position. The control switch directs the tool to retrace or trace its path according to a
retrace on/off signal received from the machine.
When the trace signal is turned on, the tool retraces the path covered so far. When the trace signal is subse-
quently turned off, the tool returns along the retraced path to the machining position.
RVRS blinks on the CRT screen during retracing, and RTRY blinks when returning along the retraced path.
RTRY continues blinking until normal operation is resumed after the tool returns to the block where retracing
was started. When there are no more blocks to retrace, message RVED blinks to indicate the end of the current
retrace.
The maximum number of blocks that can be retraced is between 40 and 80 blocks executed in an automatic
mode such as memory, tape, or MDI operation.
The retraction speed is set by a parameter (No.1494).
126
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Starts retracing.
Retrace signal on
Ends retracing and starts returning.
(Skip cutting)
127
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
NOTE 8 Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder for the operations of the
M, S, T, and second auxiliary function (B function) performed during retrace.
NOTE 9 The blocks created internally in the control unit are included in the retrace path.
In the following figure, four blocks of move commands are created instead of the two
programmed blocks. In this case, the singleblock stop positions may differ between retrace
and return.
3
2 4
1 2
NOTE 10 The blocks executed are stored as long as memory is available. Eighty or more blocks can
be retraced in some cases.
NOTE 11 A programmed entry (G10) of a tool compensation value is ignored during retrace and return.
NOTE 12 If a coordinate system setting command (G92) appears during retrace, the display of the
current position during return may differ from the actual position. However, the machine
position is not changed.
NOTE 13 The tool retraces its path through blocks in the programmable mirror image mode (G50.1 or
G51.1) in mirror image. Blocks that have been mirrorimaged by a data setting command or
a machine signal are memorized without mirror image. The mirror image set by the data setting
command or machining signal is valid in both retrace and return.
NOTE 14 If the cutter compensation or tool length offset data is changed during retrace or return, the
original data stays valid until ordinary operation is resumed after the machine has returned to
the machining position.
NOTE 15 Retracing in a block containing any of the following commands is invalid. If any of them appear
during retrace, the retrace is immediately terminated, and the message RVED appears on the
CRT screen.
Inch/millimeter conversion (G20, G21)
Reference point return function (G28, G29, G30)
Thread cutting (G33)
Remote buffer (G05)
NOTE 16 When any of the following functions is being executed, retrace is invalid. If any of them appear
during retrace, the message RVED appears on the CRT screen.
Circular threading B (G02.1, G03.1)
Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)
Cylindrical interpolation (G7.1)
Highspeed machining (G10.3, G11.3)
Exponential function interpolation (G02.3, G03.3)
NOTE 17 The following function disables this function.
Multibuffer
NOTE 18 Use of the twoblock readahead function (set when bit 1 (XBUF) of parameter No. 7616 is
1) disables the this function.
128
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
NOTE Even if the feedrate override signal is set to 0%, a manual handle interrupt is accepted.
(2) The axis subject to a manual handle interrupt is determined by the manual handle selection signal. Only
one axis is selected for each manual pulse generator.
(3) The feedrate for manual handle interrupt must be determined so that when it is added algebraically to the
feedrate observed on the axis in the uninterrupted state, the result of addition must not exceed the upper
limit of the cutting feedrate for that axis.
Example Suppose that the upper limit of the cutting feedrate on a given axis is 5 m/min. If the tool is
moving along that axis in the positive direction at 2 m/min, the manual pulse generator can
be turned to set up to 3 m/min. When the same movement is interrupted by turning the gener-
ator in the negative direction, up to 7 m/min is possible.
If the manual pulse generator is turned in beyond the limit, the excess pulses generated from
the generator are discarded. Consequently, the reading of the pulse generator disagrees with
the actual traveled distance made by the interrupt.
(4) The magnification used in the manual handle interrupt depends on the states of signals MP1, MP2, and
MP4.
(5) If the direction of movement is reversed as a result of a manual handle interrupt, backlash compensation
is applied. In this case, pitch error compensation is applied to the position set after the interrupt.
For a manual handle interrupt, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the time constant
for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feed acceleration/deceleration
(parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to 1, however, the time constant for jog feed
acceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that the application of acceleration/deceleration for a manual handle
interrupt is based only on the time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration.
129
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
(G90G54)
Shift by manual
Path after interrupt handle interrupt
(G90G53)
(Workpiece and local coordinate systems after interrupt)
130
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
131
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
(2) Performance
Automatic operation in the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is the same as normal automatic
operation. Therefore, the following explains manual operation only.
(a) Simultaneous automatic and manual operation (in relation to automatic operation)
As indicated in the above table, the setup type is not affected by automatic operation. For the interrupt
type, interrupts are possible in modes other than the positioning mode.
NOTE In the positioning mode, the tool is moved at the rapid traverse feedrate. Therefore, blocks
containing G28 and G29 are also included.
NOTE 1 (*1) The feedrate along the axis subject to an interrupt is the result of superimposition of the
feedrate by the manual interrupt on the feedrate in automatic operation. If the resultant
feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate for that axis, it is clamped at the maximum
cutting feedrate.
NOTE 2 (*2) For interrupt type, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the time
constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feed
acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to
1, however, the time constant for jog feed acceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that the
application of acceleration/deceleration is based only on the time constant for cutting feed
acceleration/deceleration.
132
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
133
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
6 (i) To store a feedrate override value, press <FEDMEM> with a desired override position set.
(ii) To store a spindle speed override, press <SPNMEM> with a desired override position set.
(iii) To store both a feedrate override and spindle speed override, press <F/SMEM>.
134
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
NOTE 1 An override value added to the end of a block can be edited together with the other commands
in the part program storage and edit mode. This means that override values can be inserted,
changed, and deleted.
NOTE 2 In override playback, the override switches on the operators panel can also be used. If the
override switch on the operators panel is set to 70% when a feedrate override of 80% is
specified by ,L1F80R ;, for example, an override of 56% is applied to the specified
feedrate.
NOTE 3 Override playback is enabled in every automatic operation (memory operation, part program
operation, and MDI operation).
NOTE 4 If M02 or M30 is specified during override playback, the override values effective at that time
are canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a program number is searched for, the effective
override values are also canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a reset operation is performed,
whether to cancel the override values to 100% can be selected by the NCM bit of parameter
No. 2401.
NOTE 5 If the override value specified by F exceeds 254%, 254% is assumed. If the override value
specified by S is less than 50%, 50% is assumed, and if it is more than 120%, 120% is
assumed.
NOTE 6 If teaching is performed when the cutting feedrate override cancel switch is set on, 100% is
stored as the feedrate override value.
NOTE 7 If teaching is performed twice for the same program, an override value is stored as follows:
When teaching is specified again, the override value currently played back is multiplied by the
override value set by the override switch, and the result is inserted in the program. In addition,
the override value set by the override switch at that time is recorded by the control unit. When
an override is specified later in the program, it is multiplied by the recorded override value, and
the result is inserted as a new override value.
NOTE 8 Whether teaching is enabled for programs O8000 to O9999 is determined depending on by
the NE8 and ND8 bits of parameter No. 0011 and the NE9 and ND9 bits of parameter No. 2201.
If teaching is attempted during execution of these programs when these parameters indicate
NO EDITING (NE8 = 1 or NE9 = 1) or NO DISPLAY (ND8 = 1 or ND9 = 1), a warning is issued.
(WRITE PROTECT in the former case and INVISIBLE PROGRAM in the latter.) Teaching is
not performed for the block, and operation continues.
NOTE 9 When one of the following functions is being executed, override teaching is disabled
regardless of the parameter settings. If teaching is attempted, it is performed at the first block
immediately after the function terminates. In blocks in which teaching is disabled, never insert
override values in the part program storage and edit mode.
Only teaching of a feedrate override is disabled.
Blocks other than cutting feed blocks
Dry run operation
Teaching of both feedrate and spindle speed overrides is disabled.
Canned cycle
Multiple repetitive canned cycle
Highspeed machining
Blocks internally generated for corners in cutter compensation C
NOTE 10 When one of the following functions is being executed, override playback R is invalid
regardless of the parameter settings. In this case, the specified feedrate override becomes
valid when the block starts to be executed:
Drilling canned cycle
Skip function
Chamfering/corner rounding
Direct drawing dimension programming
NOTE 11 If feed hold or reset is specified for the same block after teaching, the taught values are
canceled.
NOTE 12 Teaching is not valid unless movement along the target axis is in progress.
NOTE 13 For a block executed repeatedly, do not specify override values through teaching or in the part
program storage and edit mode.
The following blocks may be executed repeatedly:
(1) Blocks in a subprogram called repeatedly by M98 or G65.
(2) Blocks in a main program executed repeatedly by M99.
(3) Blocks repeated in a WHILE statement and GOTO statement
135
6. TEST OPERATION B62564E1/02
6. TEST OPERATION
NOTE 1 When a G27, G28 or G30 command is specified, the tool does not go to the reference position
and the reference position return completion led does not go on.
NOTE 2 The M, S, T, and second miscellaneous functions (B) are executed.
NOTE During manual/automatic simultaneous operation, manual operation is executed without the
tool being locked.
NOTE M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed as usual.
136
B62564E1/02 6. TEST OPERATION
Dry run
Rapid
p traverse button Positioningg type
yp Programmed command
(RT signal)
i l) (#LRP of parameter No.1400) For rapid traverse For cutting feed(*2)
The dry run feedrate (parameter
Rapid traverse rate No. 1410) is overridden by the
RT=ON LRP=0/1
(parameter No. 1420) maximum manual feedrate over-
ride value (parameter No. 2016).
NOTE 1 For rapid traverse, the indicated feedrates are valid only when RDR of parameter No.1400 is 1. If
RDR is 0, the rapid traverse rate is used in the same way as when the rapid traverse button is set
to ON.
NOTE 2 The dry run feedrate does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.1422).
(The feedrate is clamped at the maximum cutting feedrate.)
Single block
One block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If the cycle start button is
pressed, the next block is executed and then the execution is stopped again.
NOTE 1 If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at an intermediate point.
NOTE 2 In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of (1) , (2) , and (6) shown below.
When the single block function is effective at points (1) or (2) , the feed hold lamp lights.
137
6. TEST OPERATION B62564E1/02
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3) (5)
(4)
NOTE 3 Single block stop is not performed in blocks containing M98P_;. M99;and G65, G66, G67.
However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99 command, if the
block contains an address other than O, N or P.
138
B62564E1/02 6. TEST OPERATION
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
3 After the N03 block to be corrected is executed in reverse, the tool is stopped and the program is edited.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
139
6. TEST OPERATION B62564E1/02
6.6.1 Modes
This function can be executed only in the test mode.
The test mode is enabled when both the memory mode signal and test mode signal (G02.2) are high.
When the TSKY bit (bit 2 of parameter 2004) is set to 1, the test mode can be selected by pressing the [TEST
ON] soft key. This is an operation selection key for the program text screen and program check screen in
memory mode.
After the test mode is selected, the mode status indication changes to TEST.
6.6.2 Operation
(1) Basic Procedure for Retrace Editing
1 Select the test mode.
or
MEMORY+TEST MEMORY then
Cycle start
3 Perform a singleblock stop or feedhold stop in the block in which a program error is detected.
OFF ON
or
OFF ON
or
Reverse
Soft key
140
B62564E1/02 6. TEST OPERATION
6 After required blocks are executed in reverse, perform a singleblock stop or feedhold stop and terminate
reverse operation.
G01X0. Y20. ;
G02 X10. Y0.
:
:
>G03
NOTE The program cannot be edited when the STL signal is high.
141
6. TEST OPERATION B62564E1/02
9 Restart forward operation. Operation is started from the last block executed in reverse operation.
Cycle start
Reverse operation is
terminated, the tool is
N03 stopped, the program
is edited, and forward
operation is restarted.
Reverse operation
is started.
-20
X
0
N04
142
B62564E1/02 6. TEST OPERATION
(2) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after the Reverse Signal is Switched Dur-
ing Execution
Reverse operation and subsequent forward operation can be started in rapid traverse (G00), linear inter-
polation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), dwell (G04), skip cutting (G31) or in a miscellaneous func-
tion in test mode. However, reverse operation and subsequent forward operation are not started immedi-
ately after the reverse signal is switched. They are started after the block is completed, that is, after the
move, dwell, or miscellaneous function is completed.
(3) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after a FeedHold Stop
If the reverse signal is switched after a feedhold stop is made in rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation
(G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03) or skip cutting (G31), the reverse operation or subsequent forward
operation can be started at that point.
This operation cannot be executed when a dwell (G04) or miscellaneous function is executed.
When reverse operation is started after a feedhold stop, the movement from the start point of the block
to the position at which the feedhold stop is made is stored as a block.
Feed-hold stop
Reverse signal, high
Feed-hold stop Cycle start
Reverse signal, low
Cycle start
Breakpoint
between blocks
Reverse operation is terminated
and subsequent forward operation
is started.
(4) Starting Reverse Operation and Normal Operation after a SingleBlock Stop
If the reverse signal is switched after a singleblock stop, reverse operation or forward operation can be
started at that point.
Single-block stop
Reverse signal, high
Single-block stop Cycle start
Reverse signal, low
Cycle start
143
6. TEST OPERATION B62564E1/02
6.6.3 Display
(1) The program screen in the test mode is different than in other modes with regard to the following points:
1 During operation in the test mode, the cursor is moved over text to indicate the current block.
(See Fig. 6.6.3(a))
<Current block>
14inch CRT: Lightblue cursor
9inch CRT: Dim cursor
<Block in the preread state>
Same as the conventional system
14inch CRT: Yellow cursor
9inch CRT: Highlighted cursor
2 Executed and preread blocks can be discriminated from blocks to be executed.
<Executed or preread blocks>
14inch CRT: Green characters
9inch CRT: Highlighted characters
<Blocks to be executed>
14inch CRT: White characters
9inch CRT: Normal characters
3 When a program that contains blocks that do not fit on one page is executed, the screen can be scrolled.
A new page contains the last three lines on the previous page. (On a 9inch CRT screen, a new page
contains the last two lines on the previous page.) (See Fig. 6.6.3(b))
4 When the screen is scrolled by pressing the , , , or key, a new page contains the last three lines
on the previous page. (On a 9inch CRT screen, a new page contains the last two lines on the previous
page.)
(2) During reverse operation, the REVS indication blinks on the CRT screen. When no more blocks can be
executed in reverse, the RVED indication blinks.
TEST***REVS****MTN*** 09:28:06 LSK
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST REWIND +
WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH OFF OFF
TEST***RVED**** *** *** 09:28:06 LSK
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST REWIND +
WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH OFF OFF
144
B62564E1/02 6. TEST OPERATION
(3) When a figure is drawn on graphic display A during machining, a parameter can be used to specify the color
in which reverse movement is indicated.
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST REWIND +
WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH ON OFF
6.6.4 Note
1) Manual intervention
When manual intervention is made after a feedhold stop or singleblock stop, cancel the manual interven-
tion before starting reverse operation. Then set the reverse signal to high.
2) Tool paths when the rapid traverse command (G00) is executed in reverse operation and subsequent for-
ward operation
The tool path in reverse operation depends on the path of rapid traverse selected by the LRP bit (parameter
1400). When the tool is positioned using linear interpolation, the path in reverse operation is the same as
in subsequent forward operation. When the tool is positioned using nonlinear type positioning, the tool
paths do not agree with each other.
3) Dwell command
The dwell command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward operation, just as in the nor-
mal operation.
4) Tool paths when the skip cutting (G31) command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward
operation
The distance traveled in reverse operation or subsequent forward operation does not agree with the pro-
145
6. TEST OPERATION B62564E1/02
grammed distance. It is equal to the distance by which the tool actually travels until the skip signal goes
high when the block is first executed. When the skip cutting command is executed in reverse operation
or subsequent forward operation, the skip signal is ignored.
5) Operation using miscellaneous functions
Miscellaneous functions specified by the M and S codes may cause different movements during reverse
and forward operation. To prevent this, these miscellaneous functions must be nested or machine opera-
tion must be reversed when the reverse signal is high.
O1 2 3 4 ;
N1 ;
N2 S 1 0 0 0 ;
Machining program
N1 0 S 1 0 0 0 ;
N1 1 S 2 0 0 0 ;
Machining program
N2 0 S 2 0 0 0 ;
3
4
2 Tool path after
compensation
Programmed
5
tool path
1
(2)
(1)
Although two blocks are programmed for the example shown above, four movecommand blocks are
created for actual machining.
7) Tool compensation entered by the program is ignored during reverse operation.
8) Command for specifying the coordinate system (G92) during reverse operation
If the command for specifying a coordinate system (G92) is executed during reverse operation, the current
position displayed may be different from the corresponding position displayed during forward operation.
However, the actual tool positions are the same.
9) Mirror image
When a block created using mirrorimage programming (G50.1, G51.1) is executed in reverse operation,
the tool follows the actual mirrored path.
A block created for mirror images using settings or machine signals is stored in its original state (not mir-
rored). The mirror image created using settings or machine signals is valid during both reverse and subse-
quent forward operation.
10)Changing an offset value
If the cutter compensation or tool length offset is changed during reverse operation or subsequent forward
operation, the tool is moved according to the original offset value specified when the block was first
executed. The new offset value becomes valid when normal operation is started after subsequent forward
operation is completed.
11) Commands that cannot be executed during reverse operation.
Blocks containing the following commands cannot be executed during reverse operation. When the sys-
tem encounters one of these commands during reverse operation, the system stops reverse operation at
that point and indicates RVED.
146
B62564E1/02 6. TEST OPERATION
147
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS B62564E1/02
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool builder, the button can usually
be unlocked by twisting it.
7.2 Overtravel
When the tool moves beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, an error code (0T001 to 0T008)
is displayed and the tool slows down and stops. This also happens when the tool enters the prohibited area
defined by the stored stroke limit specified by the program or setting data. If the tool stops (Refer to II19), press
the reset button to release the alarm and manually move the tool in the opposite direction. For the exact opera-
tion of overtravel, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
148
B62564E1/02 7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
NOTE 1 This function checks whether the endpoint coordinate of the move command in each block
is in the prohibited area but does not check the halfway path of the command. In addition, an
alarm occurs when the tool passes the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2.
149
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS B62564E1/02
Prohibited area of stored stroke
limit 1 or 2
End point
Start point
Stored stroke limit 1 or 2 stops
the tool at point a.
Prohibited area of stored stroke
limit 1 or 2
End point
Start point Pre-travelstrokelimitcheckstopsthetool
immediately after the tool starts to move.
NOTE 2 If the machine lock switch is on when movement in the block starts, the pretravel stroke limit
check function is not executed.
NOTE 3 If stored stroke limit 2 is invalid (in the G23 mode), the prohibited area defined by stored stroke
limit 2 is not checked.
150
B62564E1/02 7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
CAUTION This function is disabled when the tool attempts to enter an area set as inhibited by stored
stroke limit 1 as a result of a manual interrupt operation such as an interrupttype
manualautomatic simultaneous operation or manual handle interrupt. In such a case, an
alarm is output. This function is enabled for setuptype manualautomatic simultaneous
operation.
NOTE 1 This function is enabled from the point when reference position return is completed, in the same
way as for the conventional specifications.
NOTE 2 If another warning message is already being displayed when the tool attempts to enter an
inhibited area, the original message remains as is and the warning message for this function
is not displayed.
NOTE 3 Warning messages for this function can be cleared by changing the screen, resetting, or
pressing the CANCEL soft key, in exactly the same way as for all other warning messages.
WARNING
The warning messages as following is displayed, and machine is stopped.
Messages Explanation
+OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored
stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction.
Backing out the tool in the negative direction automatically clears this
warning message.
OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored
stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction.
Backing out the tool in the positive direction automatically clears this
warning message.
151
8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS B62564E1/02
152
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
153
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
9" CRToperationguidancekeys
SearchthisAddanew
A L L 1-PROGRAM (PROG#) (FILE#)
program program
number. tothis
position.
14" CRToperationselectionkeys
CONDEN DELETE READ PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +
SE FILE
14" CRToperationguidancekeys
A L L PROG (PROG (FILE
RAM #) #)
(3) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.
(4) When the READ key is pressed, the soft keys function as operation guidance keys.
(5)
154
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
155
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
(1) Establish the status in which part pro- 9" CRT operation selection keys
grams can be edited. (See Section ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD GB-EDT +
9.1.)
(2) Press the operation menu key to switch
the soft keys to operation selection
9 CRT soft keys displayed when DELETE is pressed
keys.
WORD ~EOB ~(WORD) PROGRAM
(3) Press the DELETE key.
(4) Press the PROGRAM key.
(5) 9" CRT soft keys displayed when PROGRAM is pressed
When deleting all part programs A L L THIS (PROG#)
edited.
When deleting the currently se-
14" CRT soft keys displayed when DELETE is pressed
lected program
WORD ~EOB ~(W PROG
ORD) RAM
(5)1 Press the THIS key.
The currently selected
program is deleted and the 14" CRT soft keys displayed when PROGRAM is pressed
soft keys return to operating A L L THIS (PROG
as the operation selection #)
keys.
When deleting the specified part
program
(5)1 Press the (PROG#) key.
(5)2 Enter the program number
and press the EXEC key.
(5)2 To delete multiple programs
at a time, delimit the upper
and lower program numbers
with commas (, ).
Example When 0100,0200 is en-
tered and the EXEC key is
pressed, programs 0100
to 0200 are deleted.
156
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
address
TOP REPEAT (WORD) (PROG#) PRVIOS
(3)1 Press (WORD). PRGRAM
157
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
(b) Once a forward or backward search is performed under a certain condition with a certain mode
and screen, the search can be repeated under the same search condition even with other modes
and screens provided that the new modes and screens are those to which the repeat function is
applicable (Example 1). If the search condition is one not displayed with the operation guide key,
however, the warning message FORMAT ERROR or CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIF-
FERENT) will be issued (Examples 2 and 3) .
(c) For words, sequence numbers, and program numbers, the forward and backward search func-
tions are not distinguished from each other (Example 4) .
Example 1 After a word is searched for on the edit mode program screen, the same word can be
searched for on the MDI mode program screen.
Example 2 A word search is not available on the tape mode program screen. If the repeat search function
is used on the tape mode program screen even for the same word that was searched for on
the edit mode program screen, the warning message FORMAT ERROR will be issued.
Example 3 After executing _SRCH BOTTOM, if you try to execute B_SRCH REPEAT, the warning mes-
sage CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIFFERENT) will be issued.
Example 4 After making a forward search using F_SRCH G01 EXEC, you can perform a backward
search by pressing B_SRCH REPEAT.
(3) Caution
If you try to use the repeat search function before using the forward and backward search functions,
the warning message CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER IS EMPTY) will be issued.
158
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
159
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
To insert data
(4)1 Press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key.
(4)2 Press the (WORD) key.
(4)3
i) To insert one word, enter the new word.
ii) To insert two or more words, enter the new words.
iii) To insert two or more blocks, enter the blocks.
(4)4 Press EXEC key.
The entered word(s) are inserted immediately after the word containing the cursor.
The cursor is moved to the last inserted word.
Each soft key returns to an operation selection key.
To delete data
(4)1
i) To delete only one word, press the DLTWRD soft key or the DELETE hard key.
ii) To delete two or more words, press the DELETE soft key and perform the following:
(4)2
i) When the (WORD) key is pressed, the word indicated by the cursor is deleted. The soft keys re-
turn to operating as operation selection keys.
ii) When the ~EOB key is pressed, the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB) are
deleted. The soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.
iii) To delete the words from the cursor position to the specified word,
1) press the (WORD) key,
2) enter the word, and
3) press the EXEC key.
The words from the cursor position to the specified word are deleted. The soft keys return to the
operating as the operation selection keys.
160
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
<MULTI EDIT>
<MULTI END>
Press the MULTI EDIT key. Enter Oxxxx
PROGRAM 01234 N12345
from the MDI panel, then press the EXEC
01234 ; 05678 ;
.................... ; ........... ;
key. (This is the same operation as for
........... ; .................... ; starting background editing.)
................ ; ........ ;
........ ; ............... ; In this example, O5678 is entered.
When the multiedit mode starts, the
screen is divided into left and right areas for
displaying two programs at the same time.
The program to be edited is displayed in
green. (Initially, the program on the right
is indicated as the target program). A
rogram on the left can be made the target
MULTI RIGHT
END /LEFT program by pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key.
Each program can be edited as usually,
<Operation menu key>
except that it is displayed on only half the
screen.
161
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
Press the operation menu key a few times.
Until the soft keys for extended part
program editing appear.
Copy and move operations can now be
<Operation menu key> performed between both the left and right
COPY MOVE MERGE CHANG programs.
E
Merge and replacement operations
<COPY> conform to the standard extended part
<MOVE> program editing specifications.
<Operation menu key>
When the COPY or MOVE key is pressed,
TO KEY TO PRO the soft key indications change (same as
BUFFER GRAM
standard indications).
When the <TO PROGRAM> key is
(Not displayed <TO PROGRAM>
pressed, the soft key indications change
when MOVE is
pressed) (same as standard indications).
Copying into the keyin buffer (TO KEY
BUFFER) conform to standard extended
(Not displayed when part program editing specifications.
MOVE is pressed)
<RIGHT/LEFT>
<RIGHT/LEFT>
Pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key switches
PROGRAM 01234 N12345 the program to be edited (the source of copy
01234 ; 05678 ; and move operation).
.................... ; ........... ;
........... ; .................... ; The program to be edited is displayed in
................ ; ........ ;
........ ; ............... ; green and the other program is displayed in
white.
162
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
A
A
Move the cursor to the end point, then press
PROGRAM 01234 N12345 the ~ CURSOR key. To specify the end
01234 ; 05678 ; point as the end of the program, press the
.................... ; ........... ;
........... ; .................... ; ~ BOTTOM key.
........ ;
............... ;
To copy the entire program, do not specify
the start point. Simply press the ALL key.
As shown in this example, when the target
program to be edited is changed to the other
program after the COPY or MOVE key was
pressed, the other program automatically
becomes the target program (the
destination program for copy or move
EXEC (PROG RIGHT operation).
#) /LEFT
To change the destination program for copy
and move operations to the other program,
press the RIGHT/LEFT key.
Each time the CONFIRM key is pressed,
PROGRAM 01234 N12345 the cursor moves alternately to the start
01234 ; 05678 ; point and end point of the copy or
.................... ; ........... ;
........... ; .................... ; movement source range. This is done so
........ ;
............... ;
that the user can check the range before
starting a copy or move operation.
Move the cursor to the target destination
position, then press the EXEC key.
To create a separate program from the
specified copy or movement source range
and register it, press the PROG# key, enter
a program number, then press the EXEC
COPY MOVE MERGE CHANG key.
E
The screen to the left shows that area A of
program 01234 has been copied or moved to
program 05678.
9.5.2 Remarks
(1) The <RIGHT/LEFT> key enables the user to select the target program from the two programs displayed
during multiediting. When the target program is switched after the <COPY> or <MOVE> key is pressed,
the target program is switched automatically after the range is specified i.e., the target program is switched
to the program selected as the target program when a copy or move was specified.
(2) When multiediting is terminated, and the normal screen mode is restored, the program on the left is dis-
played regardless of which program was been selected as the target program.
To execute a program created and selected in the right area in the memory mode, it must be selected and
displayed in the left area of the screen.
(3) The program directory screen is automatically switched to the program text screen after a program search
terminates on the program directory screen.
163
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
(1) Establish the status in which part pro- 9" CRT operation selection keys
grams can be edited. (See Section CONDENS DELFILE READ PUNCH VERIFY +
9.1.)
(2) Press the operation menu key to
9" CRT operation guidance keys displayed
switch the soft keys to the operation
when the VERIFY key is pressed
selection keys.
A L L 1-PRGRM CURSOR~ (FILE#)
(3) Press the VERIFY key.
(4)
14" CRT operation selection keys
i) To collate all the part programs
on the tape with the programs in CONDENDELETE READ PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +
164
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
(1) Establish the status in which part 9" CRT operation selection keys
programs can be edited. (See CONDENS DELFILE READ PUNCH VERIFY +
Section 9.1.)
(2) Set whether to use the EIA or
ISO code as the punch code. 9" CRT soft keys displayed when the PUNCH key is
(See Section 10.3.) pressed
A L L THIS (PROG#) (FILE#)
(3) Press the operation menu key to
switch the soft keys to the opera-
tion selection keys.
14" CRT operation selection keys
(4) Press the PUNCH key.
CONDEN DELETE READ PUNCH VERIF COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +
(5) SE FILE
grams is started. #) ~ #)
When the %FEED key is pressed, the end of record (EOR) code and feed codes are output and
part program output is terminated.
When the EXSNGL key is pressed, part program output is continued until the EOB code is en-
countered.
When the EXEC key is pressed, part program output is restarted.
Feed code output can be terminated by pressing the NOFEED key when an unpunched feed
code is being output to the beginning or end of the tape.
When part program output terminates, the soft keys return to the operating as operation selection
keys.
165
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
166
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
NOTE Depending on what option is specified, the part program storage length may decrease.
Table 9.10 (a) Custom Macro Common Variables and Part Program Storage Length that Decrease
Table 9.10 (b) Offset Pairs and Part Program Storage Length that Decreases
167
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
TO-BUFF TO-PROG
WORD ~EOB
(PROG#)
EXEC
STOP
* In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the keyin buffer.
* When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.
168
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
TO-BUFF TO-PROG
WORD ~EOB
(PROG#)
EXEC
STOP
* In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the keyin buffer.
* When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.
169
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
2 Moving a program
TO-BUFF TO-PROG
WORD ~EOB
(PROG#)
EXEC
STOP
* In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the keyin buffer.
* When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.
170
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
XXXX
A A
Program XXXX is copied into new program ****. The copied program is the same as the original pro-
gram but with a different program number.
2 Copying or moving part of a program
Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TOPROG], [CURSOR~], [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM], and
[(PROG#)] in that order, then enter the program number and press the soft key EXEC.
A A
B
B B
C C
A A
B
C
Program part B of program XXXX is deleted and moved to new program ****.
That is, the portion from the start point to the end point in program OXXXX is moved to O****.
The moved portion of the program in which an editing range is specified disappear after movement.
171
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
Press the soft key (PROG#) or numeric key 0, then enter the number of the new program to be created
using copying and movement. When numeric key 0 is pressed or when program number 0 already exists,
however, a warning is issued.
When the soft key [CURSOR~] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the start point of the editing range.
When [~CURSOR] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the end point of the editing range. When
[~BOTTOM] is pressed, the end of the program is set as the end point of the editing range.
NOTE 1 [CURSOR~] can be used to set the start point of the editing range any number of times before
the end point of the editing range is set by [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM].
NOTE 2 If the end point of the editing range is set without the start point being set, a warning is issued.
NOTE 3 If the program number position is specified although the start point of the editing range is after
the end point, a warning issued during execution.
NOTE 4 The set start and end points of the editing range are effective until they are cancelled.
The start and end points are cancelled in the following cases:
When editing (except for word search, rewind and search bottom) is performed during
insertion, deletion, or alteration after the start or end point has been set. Or when a
program merge position is specified after the start or end point has been set
When the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys after the start and
end points have been set. However, if the soft keys return to operating as the operation
selection keys after only the start point has been set, the start point is not cancelled.
NOTE 5 If the area becomes insufficient when a program is being copied, a warning occurs, and
copying is suspended.
NOTE 6 In background editing, it is only possible to copy a whole program provided the program is
selected in foreground editing and it is not in the reset or rewind status. Otherwise, a warning
is issued.
NOTE 7 In the MDI mode, a program can be copied and moved into the keyin buffer only.
NOTE 8 Copying or moving part of a program is possible only when there are three or more remaining
registered programs.
NOTE 9 If the power is turned off while copying or moving part of a program, the source program may
be divided into two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case,
change the number 0 to another number and merge the programs.
NOTE 1 The program is always copied or moved into the keyin buffer in units of words. Words longer
than the keyin buffer length cannot be copied and moved.
NOTE 2 The program is always copied or moved into the keyin buffer in the addition format. If words
are already set in the keyin buffer, the program must be copied or moved one word at a time.
NOTE 3 The program list screen cannot be used to copy or move a program into the keyin buffer.
172
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
(PROG#)
CURSOR> BOTTOM
DLT-ORG CPY-ORG
STOP
A A
Merge B B
position
C
Move
B
Program XXXX and program **** are merged. O**** does not change before or after the programs are
merged.
173
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
A A
B
C
B
NOTE 1 If the soft key [MERGE] is pressed after the source program number has been set in the keyin
buffer, programs must always be merged according to (2) Merging programs by copying the
source program.
NOTE 2 If program number 0 already exists, a warning is issued.
NOTE 3 If the area becomes insufficient when programs are being merged, a warning is issued, and
merging the programs is suspended.
NOTE 4 For merging programs by copying the merge source program, at least four remaining
registered programs are needed. For merging programs by deleting the source program, at
least three remaining registered programs are needed.
NOTE 5 If the power is turned off when programs are being merged, the source program may be divided
into two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case, change the
number 0 to another number and merge programs.
NOTE 6 Programs cannot be merged in the MDI mode.
174
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
(WORD) (ADRES)
(WORD) (ADRES)
EXEC EX-SNGL
STOP
175
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
NOTE 1 If two or more words to be changed include the end of block (EOB) and are followed by other
words, they cannot be changed. (E.g.: X100;N10,X200;N20 caused a warning to be issued.)
NOTE 2 If [CHANGE] is pressed after the word or words to be changed have been set in the keyin
buffer, singleblock change is applied.
NOTE 3 When changing words or addresses terminates normally, the total number of changed words
or addresses is displayed at the beginning of the keyin buffer display line.
NOTE 4 The program list display screen cannot be used to change words or addresses.
176
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
5 Insert data of either one block or two or more blocks in the format in which the data is delimited by EOB.
6 Enter EOB and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. EOB is loaded into memory.
If 2 is set as the increment, N12 is simultaneously inserted into the next line and displayed.
7 To not insert N12 into the next block in step 6, press the DELETE key to delete N12.
177
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
NOTE 1 When data of two or more blocks is inserted, the sequence number is inserted only next to the
EOB code of the last block.
NOTE 2 If the sequence number to be automatically inserted exceeds 99999, it returns to the initial
value.
NOTE 3 Even if an EOB code (M30, etc.) is inserted at the end of the program, a sequence number is
automatically inserted. Use the DELETE key to delete the sequence number.
NOTE 4 To change a sequence number, move the cursor to the last sequence number of the program
(immediately before %), enter the sequence number to be changed, and press the ALTER key.
Subsequently, this sequence number plus an increment is automatically inserted. When N120
is entered and the ALTER key is pressed, for example, the sequence number is changed to
N120 and subsequently updated, such as 122, 124, 126, ...
178
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
The values in the following examples are valid for part program editing but cannot be used as the first digits
of the subsequent sequence numbers to be automatically inserted:
Example 1 N123456 ALTER: Digit overflow (more than five digits)
Example 2 N1234X100 ALTER: There is data other than the N command.
Example 3 N100 N1234 ALTER: There is data other than the N command.
Example 4 N100 ALTER: There is data other than numeric characters after the N command.
NOTE 5 As shown in the figure below, the first digit of the sequence number to be automatically inserted
can also be changed by deleting the last sequence number and inserting a new sequence
number.
NOTE 6 Leave an allowance of at least six characters at the end of the keyin buffer.
179
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
9.12 Playback
When the playback option is selected, teaching in the job mode and teaching in the handle mode become avail-
able. In these modes, the tool position obtained through manual operation can be loaded into memory as the
program position and a program can be created.
To load words (O, N, G, R, F, M, S, T, P, Q, and EOB, etc.) other than axis names into memory, execute the same
load operations as in the EDIT mode.
The tool position can be loaded into memory as follows:
1 Select teaching in the jog mode or teaching in the handle mode.
2 Move the tool to the desired position.
3 Press a soft key to select the program.
4 Enter address X.
5 Press the soft key INSERT to load the tool position of the Xaxis into memory.
Example X10.521 (when the absolute position is entered in mm)
X10.521 (contents loaded into memory)
6 Likewise, enter Z and press INSERT. The tool position of the Zaxis is loaded into memory.
NOTE 1 When a value is entered and INSERT is pressed after an axis address (X, Y, or Z, etc.) has been
entered, the tool position plus the entered value is loaded into memory. This operation is used
to compensate the tool position using keys.
If the entered value exceeds the maximum value, the tool position cannot be loaded into
memory.
If the entered value includes a decimal point and is less than the least input increment,
it is rounded to the least input increment.
Example The tool position is assumed to be 0. (Least input increment: 1/1000)
Entered value Value loaded
Z123456.78 Cannot be loaded
Z1.2345678 Z1.235
NOTE 2 All the coordinates loaded into memory in this operation are treated as absolute coordinates.
A value with a decimal point is loaded as a coordinate. If the coordinate to be loaded is 0,
however, no decimal point is assigned to it.
Example Coordinate Value loaded
X000.000 X0
X000.987 X0.987
X12345678 X12345.678
NOTE 3 To load the commands inserted before and after the tool position into memory, execute the
same load operations as in the EDIT mode.
NOTE 4 Numeric keys cannot be used to load values consisting of more than eight digits into memory.
NOTE 5 On the 9 CRT, up to 79 characters can be edited at a time. On the 14 CRT, up to 74 characters
can be edited at a time. If the number of characters exceeds these limits, clear all the keyed
in data once.
NOTE 6 Do not edit macro statements in the playback mode. For example, in the macro statement
#1=#1XOR #2, the exclusiveOR (XOR) instruction is processed as address X.
NOTE 7 Playback cannot be applied to the pararell axes.
180
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
Example of Operation
P0
P2
P2
The program in the above example can be loaded into memory as follows:
1 Select teaching in the handle mode.
2 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P0.
3 Select the program to be loaded.
4 Load the program number into memory.
5 Enter address N and the value 1, then press INSERT.
6 Enter address G and the value 29, then press INSERT. G92 is loaded into memory.
7 Enter in address X and press INSERT. Likewise, enter address Z and press INSERT. Then press EOB.
The P0 tool position is loaded into memory.
8 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P1.
9 Enter address G and the value 00, the press INSERT. Then enter address G90, press INSERT, enter ad-
dress X, press INSERT, and enter address Z and EOB in that order. The P1 tool position is loaded into
memory.
10 Position the tool at P2.
11 Enter address G and the value 01, then press INSERT. Then enter address Z, press INSERT, and enter
address F, the value 300, and EOB in that order. Block 3 is loaded into memory.
12 Load N4 into memory. Enter address M, the value 02 and EOB to load the last block of N4M02; into
memory. This completes loading the entire program into memory.
The program in memory can be checked in the TEACH IN mode in the same way as in the EDIT mode.
Also as in the EDIT mode, pressing INSERT for each word is not always needed. For example, the key-
strokes N, 1, G, 9, 2, X, Z, EOB, INSERT can be substituted for steps 5 to 7.
181
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
>G
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
(G CODE GUIDANCE)
G00 : POSITIONING
G01 : LINEAR IPL.
G02 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CW
G03 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CCW
G04 : DWELL
>G
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
>G
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
182
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
>G02_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
>G02_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
183
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
>G_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
(G CODE GUIDANCE)
G09 : EXACT STOP
G10 : DATA SETTING
G10.1: DATA SETTING(PC)
G17 : XY PLANE
G18 : ZX PLANE
>G_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
>G_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
4 Keyinput <8>,<1>.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N00000
Depress the <HELP> key to display the
O1234 N10 ;
standard format guidance to the G81 N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
block. N30 S3000 M03 ;
If you know that the G code of the drilling N40 %
cycle is G81 and have forgot the G81 for- (G CODE GUIDANCE)
mat, omit steps (1)(3), and just depress G73 : DRILLING(DEEP HOLE)
the <HELP> key after inputting <G>, G74 : TAPPING(COUNTER)
G76 : BORING(FINE)
<8>,<1>. G80 : CANNED CYCLE CANCEL
G81 : DRILLING
>G81_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
184
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
(G81 : DRILLING)
G81 X Y Z R F L ;
Z:Z POINT
R:R POINT
L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY)
>G81_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
(G81 : DRILLING)
G81 X Y Z R F L ;
Z:Z POINT
R:R POINT
L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY)
>G99G81X150.Y250.Z173.R100.F100;_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
NOTE 1 The guidance to the list of G codes does not include some G codes which are generally less
frequently used, for example G31.2 (multistep skip).
NOTE 2 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, an absolutely standard format
is displayed. In some cases, therefore, it may not be necessary to program according to the
guidance.
NOTE 3 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, some word addresses have
comments to explain the meaning. However, those the function of each of which is clear, such
as the dimension word addresses X, Y, Z, etc., the feed rate F, the auxiliary function M, the
spindle function S or the tool function T, etc., do not have comment.
185
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
(G87 : BORING(MANUAL))
G87 X Y Z R Q F L ;
>G87_
EDIT***STOP**** *** 03:16:16 LSK
(5) While observing the format guidance, key in the data in one block and then, press the INSERT key. The
data is inserted into the program, and the guidance display disappears.
When the CAN key is pressed, the formyat guidance display disappears and the display is returned to the
tape memory/edit or the background edit program screen.
NOTE 1 The function of format guidance with figure can be added when a 14 CRT is used.
NOTE 2 Nothing is drawn for some G codes.
When nothing is drawn for the G code, the message THIS G CODE HAS NO PICTURE is
displayed.
186
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
2210 Code(PSW)
Set a code.
When a value other than 0 is set here, the programs are
locked and the display goes blank.
Setting: 0 to 99999999
Data No. Data
2211 Key(KEY)
When the same value as the code is set here, the programs
are unlocked. The data set here is not displayed.
Setting: 0 to 99999999
187
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
188
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
189
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
NOTE Locking and unlocking programs do not change the display immediately. The display
conforms to the program protection only after another operation, such as program search, is
performed.
190
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
191
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
6 If the machining time needs to be calculated for additional programs, repeat steps (1) to (5). Then the ma-
chining time display screen sequentially displays the program numbers and machining times of the main
programs executed.
Note, however, that the machining time cannot be displayed for more than 10 main programs. If this num-
ber is exceeded, the machining times of earlier programs are discarded.
The screens below show the change in the display of the machining time. The lefthand screen displays
the machining times for 10 main programs (O0020, O0040, ..., 00200). When the machining time is calcu-
lated for an additional program (O0220), the display changes to the righthand screen.
Stamping the machining time (inserting the machining time in a program as a comment)
1 Before the elapsed machining time can be inserted as a comment in the program, the machining time of
the program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. The machining time display screen
must first be checked to see if the program number for which the machining time is to be stamped is dis-
played.
2 After setting the part program storage and edit mode or the background editing mode, select the program
screen, then select the program in which machining time is to be inserted.
Suppose that the machining time of program number O0100 is displayed on the machining time display
screen.
3 Press the <operation menu> key, and switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. Then, press
the <INSTIM> key. The program is rewound, and the machining time of the program is inserted after the
program number.
192
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
4 The machining time is inserted into a program after an existing comment, if any, in the block containing the
program number.
5 When bit TIM of parameter 0011 is set to 1, the machining time inserted as a comment in a program can
be displayed instead of the amount of memory used. The data is displayed on the program directory
screen listing the program numbers and program names.
NOTE 1 When a program is stopped due to an alarm, the machining time continues to be monitored until
the alarm is reset.
NOTE 2 If the bit for M30 in parameter No. 2400 is set to 1, the FIN completion signal is returned without
resetting the control unit with M30. This enables a program to be executed repeatedly from
the beginning. In this case, the machining time stops to be monitored when the FIN signal is
returned.
NOTE 3 The machining time of a program cannot be inserted in a program with the <INSTIM> key
unless the machining time is displayed on the machining time display screen.
NOTE 4 When the machining time inserted in a program is displayed on the program directory screen,
if the comment after the program number consists only of the machining time, the machining
time is displayed in the program name field as well as the machining time display field.
NOTE 5 If machining times are inserted in programs as shown in the examples below, the program
directory screen does not display the machining times.
193
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
194
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
Example 3 When the format of the inserted machining time is changed from the valid format
hhhHmmMssS (a threedigit number followed by H, a twodigit number followed by M, and
a twodigit number followed by S)
NOTE 6 If the machining time is calculated erroneously, for example, by pressing the <reset> key during
program execution, calculate the correct machining time by reexecuting the program. When
two or more machining times are displayed for a program on the machining time display screen,
the latest machining time is inserted in the program.
195
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
NOTE This function can only be used with the 9 CRT/MDI, not with the 14 CRT/MDI.
This section first explains the procedure by which users create a program using this function. This section then
explains the procedure for machine tool builders to create a machining menu incorporating their proprietary
machining expertise by using tools such as custom macros, and thus to implement their own conversational
functions.
(1) Outline of simple conversational programming
196
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
04
03
02
01
MENU PROGRAM
15 =
16 =
197
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
(Operation 2)
1 Press the soft key SRC_PRG.
2 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <NXT_PRG>.
(PROG#) NXT-PRG
(Operation 3)
1 Press the soft key <SRC_PRG>.
2 Enter 2.
3 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <EXEC>.
EXEC
198
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
3 The contents of all blocks from numbers 01 to 16 are deleted, and the blocks become empty.
(ii) Deletion of one block
1 Move the cursor to the block to be deleted.
2 Press the soft key <DELETE>.
4 The contents of the block where the cursor is positioned are deleted. Subsequent blocks are
shifted upward by one block.
199
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
4 When the block where the cursor is positioned contains no data, the machining menu item
entered in step (2) is set in the block.
When the block where the cursor is placed already has a machining menu item set, that block
and subsequent blocks are shifted backward by one block. The machining menu item en-
tered in step (2) is then set in the block.
When a machining menu item number is entered in step (2), the cursor position remains un-
changed if the machining menu item is not followed by an EOB code. If an EOB code is en-
tered after the machining menu item number, the cursor moves to the next block after block
insertion.
200
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
4 If no machining menu item is set in the block at which the cursor is positioned or in any subse-
quent blocks, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are set successively starting at
the first empty block.
When a machining menu item is already set in the block where the cursor is positioned or in
any subsequent blocks, that block and the subsequent blocks are shifted backward by the
number of inserted blocks. Then, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are set
successively starting at the block where the cursor is positioned.
201
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
202
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
2 The simple conversational data input screen for the machining menu item of the block appears.
203
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
2 Data is entered.
If the entered numeric value is not
followed by an EOB code, the cursor
position is not changed.
If the entered numeric value is followed
by an EOB code, the cursor moves
to the next data menu item.
Multiple data items can be entered at a time. In this case, separate the data items with EOB codes.
When the soft key <EMPTY> is pressed for a data menu item for which data has been entered,
the data input field is cleared.
204
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
NOTE Steps 3 and 4 may vary according to the machine. Refer to the relevant manual of each
machine tool builder.
205
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
is displayed.
(iii) Kanji and hiragana
Kanji and hiragana characters that cannot be directly entered can be specified using internal
codes.
The characters included in the internal code list for kanji and hiragana characters in Appendix 8
can be specified. Specify a string of internal codes, each code consisting of four hexadecimal
characters, between two at marks (@).
Example G10L60P (@8177 646A 822E 8559@);
is displayed.
An internal code starting with a character from 6 to 8 is assumed to be an internal code for
a hiragana character.
When counting the number of kanji or hiragana characters, treat one character as two alpha-
numeric characters.
206
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 0 0 0 0 @ P
0 0 0 1 1 ! 1 A Q
0 0 1 0 2 2 B R
0 0 1 1 3 # 3 C S
0 1 0 0 4 $ 4 D T
0 1 0 1 5 % 5 E U
0 1 1 0 6 & 6 F V
1 1 1 1 7 7 G W
1 0 0 0 8 ( 8 H X
1 0 0 1 9 ) 9 I Y
1 0 1 0 A * : J Z
1 0 1 1 B + ; K [
1 1 0 0 C , < L
1 1 0 1 D = M ]
1 1 1 0 E . > N ^
1 1 1 1 F / ? O _
207
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
Machining menu item name
208
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
If the specified block number has the machining menu item (tapping) set, the value of #6000 is 03.
Therefore, program number O9503 is called. This means that a program for the machining menu item
(tapping) must already have been created having program number O9503. In other words, when the
example of the machining menu above is used, the machine tool builder needs to create programs
having the following program numbers for the machining menu items in advance:
O9501 : Program for INITIAL SETTING
O9502 : Program for DRILLING
O9503 : Program for TAPPING
O9504 : Program for BORING
When a program for a machining menu item is called, the contents of the data menu items are as-
signed to system variables #9001 to #9016. Therefore, the created program needs to be able to per-
form the desired machining by referencing #6001 to #6016. A program for a machining menu item
can include conventional custom macro common variables. In general, a program for a machining
menu item ends with M99 to return to the main program.
(d) Block N4
When the machining menu item of the specified block number has been executed, operation needs
to proceed to the machining menu item of the next block number. For this purpose, block N4 incre-
ments system variable #6001 by 1 to proceed to the next block number.
(e) Block N5
If the specified block number exceeds 16, this block branches control to block N7 to terminate execu-
tion.
(f) Block N6
This block returns control to block N2 to repeat execution for the next block number.
(g) Block N7
This block marks the end of the program.
When the operator executes a simple conversational program, the main program (09420 in the exam-
ple above) for executing the simple conversational program is first executed, then the programs devel-
oped by the machine tool builder for machining menu items are called for machining.
To execute a simple conversational program, the program for executing it must be selected as the
main program in memory operation. If another program is selected as the main program in memory
operation, only the selected program is executed. The simple conversational program is not
executed.
For this reason, it is necessary to provide a switch on the machine operators panel for simple con-
versational program operation. When the switch is turned on, the system starts memory operation
after searching for the program number of the main program for executing a desired simple conversa-
tional program by using the function of workpiece number search or external data input.
(8) Additional custom macro system variables
As mentioned in Item (7) above, some custom macro system variables have been added for simple con-
versational programs. The table below summarizes the system variables.
209
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
210
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
4 Press the <operation menu> key to 9" CRT function selection keys
change the soft keys to the operation POSITIONPROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +
selection keys.
5
To set the entered value as the offset 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
value (absolute input) WEAR WRK.ZER
Press <INPUT>.
To add the entered value to the off-
set value already set (incremental in-
put) 9" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT +INPUT ORIGIN COUNTER INP-NO +
Press <+INPUT>.
6 Type the offset value.
To enter offset values for several
consecutive items at once, delimit
the values with the <EOB> key. 14" CRT function selection keys
POSI PROG OFF CHAPTE SETT ID CHAP
EOB (end of block) is represented by
TION RAM SET R ING SERRCH TER
; on the CRT.
Example: 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0
The cursor automatically proceeds 14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
to the next item when ; is found. WORK
TOOL ZERO
(Same as when the cursor key [] is
pressed)
7 Pressing the <EXEC> key sets the
entered offset value in the offset 14" CRT operation selection keys
memory location pointed to by the INPUT +IN MEASURE PUNCH INOUT ALL
PUT NUMBER CLEAR
cursor. The soft keys are changed to
the operation selection keys.
211
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
10.1.2 Clearing all tool offset values 9" CRT function selection keys
selection keys.
2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF- 9" CRT operation selection keys
SET> soft key. ALL-CLR PUNCH MEASURE
guidance keys.
5 To clear all tool offset values to 0,
press the <ALL> key. To clear all ge-
14" CRT function selection keys
ometry offset values to 0, press the
POSI PROG OFF PROGRAM SETT SERV MESSAG CHAP
<GEOM> key. To clear all tool wear TION RAM SET CHECK ING ICE E TER
offset values to 0, press the
<WEAR> key.
6 Pressing the <ALL>, <GEOM>, or
<WEAR> key clears the correspond- 14" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT +IN MEASURE PUNCH INPUT ALL CHAP
ing tool offset values to 0. The soft PUT NUMBER CLEAR TER
keys are changed to the operation
selection keys.
212
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Pagekeys
OFFSET
OFFSET
213
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF- 9" CRT function selection keys
SET> soft key to switch between the POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +
screens.
Switching between the screens can
also be performed in the following 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
way: WEAR WRK.ZER
214
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Example In a configuration with the X-, Y-, A-, and B-axes, to omit the A-and B-axis displays, specify
with bit 4 of parameter No. 1009 as follows: X=0, Y=0, A=1, B=1, Z=0
With this setting, the A-and B-axes will not be displayed on the workpiece offset setting menu.
(Shown below is an example of displays on the 9-inch CRT.)
(MM)
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 12:40:15 LSK
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +
215
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
10.3 Settings
There are two types of data to be set here. Turn on the data protection key (KEY2) when setting data.
(1) Data related to input/output
(2) Parameters set by the user
1 Enter the MDI mode.
2 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys.
3 Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times.
9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +
SETTING
9" CRT SETTING chapter selectionkeys
HANDY GENERAL OP.PANEL MACRO
216
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
For data related to input/output For parameters that can be set by the user
4 Move the cursor to the item to be Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in either
set using the cursor keys ( [] of the following ways:
[] ). a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using the
page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] [] [] ).
b)
i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft
keys to the operation selection keys.
ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the parameter number to be
displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key.
5 Press the <operation menu> key. 9" CRT operation selection keys
(when the <GENERAL>key is pressed)
6 Set data in either of the following
ways: INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO. +
a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key. 9" CRT operation selection keys
To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key. (when the <HANDY> key is pressed)
b) To set data other than 1 or 0: INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP_NO. +
once, delimit the values with 14" CRT operation selection keys
the <EOB> key. (when the <HANDY> key is pressed)
Example 100 ;200 ;300 INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT CHAPTE
PUT NUMBER R
The cursor automatically
proceeds to the next param-
eter when ; is found.
iii) Press the <EXEC> key.
217
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
SETTING
SETTING
218
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
6 To set the entered val- To add the entered value to To set a null value in To clear the variable values
ue as the variable value the variable value already set the variable
(absolute input) (incremental input)
(6) 1 Press <INPUT> (6) 1 Press <+INPUT>. Press the Press the <ALLCLR> key
and type the variable val- (6) 2 Type the incre- <EMPTY> key. to change the soft keys to
ue.(To enter values for sev- ment and press the <EXEC> the operation guidance
eral consecutive variables key. keys.
at once, delimit the values To clear all group 1 and
with the <EOB> key group 2 common variables
Example 100.0 ;200.0 to 0, press the <ALL> key.
;300.0;400.0 To clear only the group 1
The cursor au-
common variables, press
tomatically
proceeds to the <COMMON 1> key.
the next vari- To clear only the group 2
able when ; is common variables, press
found.) the <COMMON 2> key.
(6) 2 Press the
The soft keys are changed
<EXEC> key.
to the operation selection
keys.
NOTE UNDER FLOW is displayed when the value of a custom macro is in either of the following
ranges:
219
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
3, 4 PANCH
220
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
5 COMMON2 (FILE#)
6, 7 STOP NOFEED
NO
6, 7 STOP
FEED
The values and names of the common variables can be output in any mode as long as automatic operation
is in the stopped state.
When the values and names of the common variables are output to a FANUC floppy disk, the file name in the
file list is COMMON.NONVOL.
(2) Inputting the values and names of common variables
Input the values and names of the common variables using one of the following methods:
(i) The output of the values and names of common variables is read as a program in the edit mode, then
the program is executed in the memory mode.
1 Before registering the program in memory, perform steps (1) to (6).
(1) Select the EDIT mode.
(2) Display the program screen using the soft keys.
(3) Press the operation menu key to display the READ soft key.
(4) Press the READ soft key.
(5) Press (FILE#), and enter the file number. (Search for the file storing the program was output
to the FANUC disk.)
(6) Press (PROG#), enter a program number, then press EXEC.
The program number can be any number that is not currently being used.
221
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
2 After the above input operation is completed, the program created by outputting the values and
names of the common variables is displayed on the screen.
3 Change the mode to memory mode. Press the cycle start button to execute the program. The
values and names of the common variables are then input to the custom macro memory area in
the CNC.
4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure that
the values and names of the common variables are set properly.
(ii) The program created by outputting the values and names of the common variables is executed in tape
mode to directly input the values and names.
1 Set the program tape in the tape reader.
2 Select the TAPE mode.
3 Press the cycle start button. The common variables and names are input to the custom macro
memory area in the CNC.
4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure that
the values and names of the common variables are set properly.
NOTE 1 If the write protect function (parameters 7031 and 7032) is enabled for common variables,
release the protection before inputting the values and names of the common variables.
NOTE 2 Variable names are output in the following format:
222
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
10.6 Parameters
Parameters are used for adjusting the CNC according to the characteristics and functions of motors or ma-
chines connected to the CNC. The settings of the parameters depend on the machine. Setting parameters
incorrectly may cause the machine to malfunction. Generally, the user must not change the parameters.
1 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys.
2 Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key.
9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER
When the parameter screen is not displayed, there are two ways to display the parameter screen.
(i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the parameter screen is dis-
played.
(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PA-
RAM>.
3 Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in either of the following ways:
a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( []
[] ).
b)
i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the parameter number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key.
This completes the operation for displaying a parameter. To set a parameter, follow the steps be-
low.
4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state.
5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for how
to set the parameters.
6 Set data in either of the following 9" CRT operation selection keys
ways:
INPUT + INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO.
a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key.
To set 0, press the <OFF: 0>
14" CRT operation selection keys
key.
INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT READ PUNCH CHAPTE
b) To set data other than 1 and 0, PUT NUMBER R
223
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
To set the entered value as the parameter value To add the entered value to the parameter value
(absolute input) already set (incremental input)
6 1 Press <INPUT> and type the parameter 6 1 Press <+INPUT>.
value. 6 2 Type the increment and press the
(To enter values for several consecutive <EXEC> key.
parameters at once, delimit the values
with the <EOB> key.
Example 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0
The cursor automatically proceeds
to the next parameter when ; is
found.)
6 2 Press the <EXEC> key.
7 When the setting of parameters is completed, set 0 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000, to disable setting
of parameters.
224
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
When the screen for the pitch error compensation data is not displayed, there are two ways to display the
screen.
(i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the screen for the pitch error
compensation data is displayed.
(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PITCH>.
3 Position the cursor on the number of the pitch error compensation data to be set in either of the following
ways:
a) Move the cursor to the number of the desired pitch error compensation data using the page keys ( []
[] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] ).
b) i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the number of the pitch error compensation data to be displayed or set,
and press the <EXEC> key.
This completes the operation for displaying pitch error compensation data. To set pitch error com-
pensation data, follow the steps below.
4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state.
5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for how to
set the parameters.
6 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
7 Press the <INPUT> key and type the compensation data.
(To enter values for several consecutive compensation data items at once, delimit the values with the
<EOB> key.
Example 1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 9" CRT operation selection keys
The cursor automatically proceeds INPUT + INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO
to the next compensation data item
when ; is found.)
8 Press the EXEC key.
9 When the setting of pitch error com- 14" CRT operation selection keys
pensation data is completed, set 0 in INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT READ PUNCH
PUT NUMBER
bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to en-
able the setting of parameters.
225
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
For bidirectional pitch error compensation, another 1280 points (10000 to 11279) can be used for pitch
error compensation data, in addition to the conventional 1280 points. The data for the additional points
can be exchanged with an external device, modified using G10, and input/output using the PMC window,
in the same way as conventional data.
226
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
227
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
OFFSET
OFFSET
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between the screens.
Switching between the screens can also be performed in the following way:
Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool offset screen.
3 Position the cursor on the desired off- 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
set number in either of the following
two ways: WEAR WRK.ZER
<EXEC> key.
14" CRT operation selection keys
4 Press the <MEASURE> key and type
the name of the axis along which the INPU +IN MEASURE PUNCH INPUT ALL CHAPTE
T PUT NUMBER CLEAR R
tool length is to be measured.
5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axis 14" CRT operation guide keys
specified in 4 is effective until a new
ALL- (AXIS)
axis is specified. AXS
6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring
the tool length.
7 Press the <MEASURE> key.
8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guid-
ance keys.
9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for mea-
suring the tool length.
The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be mea-
sured) is displayed as the relative position.
10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.
228
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory location
pointed to by the cursor.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.
CAUTION Bit LXY in parameter No. 6000, specifies that tool length compensation is always performed
along the Z axis. If this bit is set to 0, the Z axis is set as the axis along which the tool length
is measured when the power is turned on.
(2) When the tool offset function using tool numbers is provided
1 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys.
2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. Either of the following screens is displayed:
OFFSET OFFSET
OFFSET
9" CRT function selection keys
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between screens.
Switching between screens can also be performed in the following way:
Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
Pressing the <TL.DATA> key displays the screen for the tool offset function using tool numbers.
229
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
3 Move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] []
[] [] ).
4 Press the <MEASURE> key and type the name of the axis along which the tool length is to be mea-
sured.
5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axis specified in 4 is effective until a new axis is specified.
9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
PUNCH MEASURE
6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring
the tool length.
7 Press the <MEASURE> key.
8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guide
keys.
9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for mea-
suring the tool length.
The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be mea-
sured) is displayed as the relative position.
10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.
11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory location
pointed to by the cursor.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.
230
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Reference tool
Tool Tool Tool
Machine zero point T01 T02 T03
(Z coordinate of the
tip of the reference tool)
OFSL01 OFSL03
OFSL02
231
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
In class B measurement of the tool length, a tool is moved by manual feed until the tip of the tool touches
the top of the workpiece or reference block. This surface is called the measurement surface. The top of
the table on the machine cannot be actually used as the measurement surface because the table will be
damaged. Assume, however, that the top of the table is used. Distance L from the machine zero point
to the top of the table is a value specific to the machine. Set L in a parameter. If the Z coordinate of the
tool tip when it touches the top of the table (Zt) is known, the tool length compensation value OFSL can
be easily calculated from L and Zt. However, because the top of the table cannot be used as the measure-
ment surface, tool length compensation value OFSL is actually obtained in the following way: Define the
top of the table as the reference measurement surface and set the distance from the reference measure-
ment surface to the actual measurement surface, that is, the height of the workpiece or reference block
(Hm). OFSL is calculated using the formula shown below.
Zm
Zt Zm
L Measurement
surface
Measurement
surface
Workpiece Hm
Reference Reference
measurement block Hm
surface Table on the machine Table on the machine
L : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the reference measurement
surface (Z coordinate of the reference measurement surface in the machine coordinate system)
Hm : Distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface
Zm : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the tool to be measured to the measurement surface
(Zt : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the tool to be measured to the reference
measurement surface)
OFSL : Tool length compensation value (OFSL = Zm - Hm - L)
This method of setting the actual tool length as the tool length compensation value has the advantage that
subsequent remeasurement is not necessary when the workpiece is changed, provided there is no wear.
Another advantage is as follows. When machining several workpieces at once, it is only necessary to as-
sign workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 to the workpieces and set the offset from each workpiece
reference position. Resetting the tool length compensation value is not necessary.
232
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
(2) Method 2
Method 2 uses the distance from the position of the tool tip when the machine is at the machine zero point
to the workpiece reference position as the tool length compensation value. The basic idea is the same
as in method 1: The difference between the length of a tool and that of the reference tool is defined as the
tool length compensation value. The reference tool in method 2, however, is a virtual tool whose tip has
the same Z coordinate as the workpiece reference position when the machine is at the machine zero point.
Machine
zero point
Tool
T01
Tool
Tool T03
T02
Reference
tool
OFSL01
OFSL03
OFSL02
Workpiece
reference
position
Workpiece
In this method, the reference measurement surface is a surface containing the workpiece reference posi-
tion. Because the tip of the reference tool is on the same surface, distance L from the tip of the reference
tool to the reference measurement surface is 0. Set 0 in the parameter for L. Generally, the actual mea-
surement surface is the same as the reference measurement surface containing the workpiece reference
position. When the top of the reference block is used as the measurement surface or the workpiece refer-
ence position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shifted from the top by the cutting allowance),
set the distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface in Hm. Tool
length compensation value OFSL is calculated using the same formula as in method 1.
233
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
Machine
zero point Tool Tool
T01 T01
Zm
Zm OFSL
OFSL
Measurement
surface
Hm
Workpiece reference position
( reference measuremnt surface)
Hm
Workpiece
Reference
block
Table on the machine Table on the machine
L : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the
reference measurement surface (= 0)
Hm : Distance from the reference measurement surface to the
actual measurement surface
Zm : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the
tool to be measured tothe measurement surface
OFSL : Tool length compensation value(OFSL = Zm - Hm - L)
In method 2, the reference tool is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the workpiece refer-
ence position when the machine is at the machine zero point. Therefore, it is generally necessary to mea-
sure the tool length compensation value again when the workpiece is changed. The same compensation
value, however, can be used by setting one of G54 to G59 to the distance along the Z axis between the
reference position for the new workpiece and that for the workpiece used when the compensation value
was measured as an offset value.
Thought of in another way, this method sets the offset from the workpiece reference position as the tool
length compensation value of each tool.
234
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
4 Set the distance between the reference measurement surface and actual measurement surface by enter-
ing the value with numeric keys and pressing the <HM_INP> soft key.
5 Select the tool whose length compensation value to be measured. When the screen for measuring the
tool length compensation value is selected and the OFST status display is blinking at the bottom of the
screen, T commands or M commands can be specified on this screen even in the manual handle feed or
continuous manual mode. Entering Ttttt and pressing the cycle start button on the machine operators pan-
el or CRT MDI panel executes the Ttttt program command and selects the tool to be measured. Generally,
enter M06 to move the tool to the position of the spindle. The tool whose length compensation value to
be measured is set at the position of the spindle. Position the cursor at the tool length compensation num-
ber assigned to the compensation value for the tool.
6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the measurement surface
of the workpiece or reference block.
7 Press the <MEASURE> soft key. The tool length compensation value is set in tool compensation memory
according to the abovementioned formula. For tool compensation memory B or C, the tool length com-
pensation value is set as the tool geometry compensation value and 0 is set in the tool wear compensation
value. The cursor remains on the same tool compensation number. Pressing the <MEASUR+> soft key
automatically moves the cursor to the next number after setting is completed.
When the tool length compensation value is set, the tool automatically moves to the tool change position.
8 The procedure for measuring the tool length compensation value for a tool is now completed. Repeat the
operations from step 5 for each subsequent tool.
When the tool length compensation values for all the tools are measured, turn off the TOOL LENGTH COM-
PENSATION switch on the operators panel on the machine. When the switch is turned off, the OFST sta-
tus display at the bottom of the screen goes off.
235
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
NOTE 1
i. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory B
ii. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory C
NOTE 2 Generally, a tool is moved along the Z axis because a tool is mounted in parallel with the Z axis.
Some machines, however, has the W axis which is parallel with the Z axis. It may be convenient
for such machines to move a tool along the W axis for measuring the tool length compensation
value. There are also machines which have an attachment for mounting a tool in parallel with
an axis other than the Z axis. On such machines, the tool length compensation value can be
measured along an arbitrary axis. When the tool length compensation value can be measured
along an axis other than the Z axis, note the following:
Set the distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the reference
measurement surface (L) in a parameter for each axis along which it is possible to measure
the tool length compensation value, not only for the Z axis. The distance from the reference
measurement surface to the actual measurement surface (Hm) must be measured along each
axis. After moving the tool along an axis until it touches the workpiece or reference block, enter
the name of the axis before pressing the <MEASURE> or <MEASUR+> soft key. When
measuring along the W axis, for example, enter W before pressing the <MEASURE> or
<MEASUR+> soft key.
NOTE 3 The operator selects the tool length compensation number assigned to the compensation
value for the tool to be measured by positioning the cursor on the number. Some machines,
however, automatically position the cursor when the tool is selected. Refer to the manual
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
236
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Machine
zero point
OFSL Tool
OFSWG54
ZmG54 OFSWG55 ZmG55
Workpiece
Workpiece reference position
reference position (G55)
Workpiece(G55)
(G54) Workpiece(G54)
OFSL : Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference
position is measured
ZmG54 : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position
of G54 when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL
ZmG55 : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position
of G55 when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL
OFSWG54 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G54
OFSWG55 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G55
The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z
axis is calculated using the following formula:
OFSW = Zm OFSL
where
OFSW: Offset from the workpiece reference position
OFSL: Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position
is measured
Zm: Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position when
measured with a tool whose length is OFSL
237
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
(b) Method 2
As mentioned previously, the tool length compensation value measured in method 2 equals the offset
from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis. The setting of the offset from the
workpiece reference position is therefore not necessary. The setting of the offset from the workpiece
reference position, however, can substitute for subsequently measuring the tool length compensation
value in the following case: When the workpiece is changed after the tool length compensation value
is measured for a workpiece or when workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 are assigned for ma-
chining several workpieces at once.
Machine
zero point
Tool
ZmG55
OFSL
Workpiece
reference position
(G55)
Workpiece
reference position OFSWG55
Workpiece(G55)
(G54)
Workpiece(G54)
In method 2, the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is calculated
using the same formula as in method 1.
OFSW = Zm OFSL
where
OFSW : Offset from the workpiece reference position
OFSL : Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position
is measured
Zm : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position
when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL
238
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
(2) Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the X or Y axis
The offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis can be easily measured whether
the workpiece reference position is on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of a machined hole.
(a) When the workpiece reference position is on a surface
+Y
Workpiece
+X
Workpiece
Offset from the workpiece reference position
reference position measured
along the Y axis
The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is on a side of the workpiece.
The basic idea for measuring the offset along the X or Y axis with the workpiece reference position
on a surface of the workpiece is the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference
position along the Z axis described in item (1). What is different is that the offset from the workpiece
reference position along the X or Y axis is measured considering the cutter diameter, whereas the off-
set along the Z axis is measured considering the tool length.
+Z
+X
Tool
Workpiece
OFSR
Xm
OFSW
OFSR :Cutter compensation value when the offset from the workpiece
reference position is measured
Xm :Traveled distance from the machine zero point to the workpiece
reference position when measured with a tool whose length is OFSR
OFSW:Offset from the workpiece reference position
The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured is calcu-
lated with the following formula:
OFSW = Xm OFSR
Be careful of the sign of cutter compensation value OFSR.
The sign of OFSR is negative when the measurement surface is located in the positive direc-
tion from the center of the tool.
239
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
(b) When the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machined hole
+Y
Workpiece
+X
The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machined
hole in the workpiece. In this case, measure the positions of three points on the inside wall of the hole
using a measuring probe with a sensor on the tip. The three points uniquely define the circle on which
they lie, enabling the workpiece reference position for the X and Y axes to be determined as the center
of the circle.
+Z
Measuring probe with a sensor
+X
+Y
+X
240
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
(3) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position
(a) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z axis
1 Set a tool at the position of the spindle. Select the tool with an MDI instruction. The tool length
compensation value of the selected tool must be already measured.
2 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode.
3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the opera-
tors panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that
for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinks
at the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the work-
piece reference position is completed.
4 Enter the tool length compensation value of the selected tool with the numeric keys and press the
TL_INP soft key. (The following is the screen when the parameter is set so that the measurement
is not made according to the reference hole.)
5 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. The
cursor can be on an offset value other than one along the Z axis.
6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the top of the
workpiece.
7 Enter the axis (Z), press the <MEASURE> soft key, and press the <INPUT> soft key. The offset
from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is set according to the abo-
vementioned formula. The cursor is located on the set offset value. When a parameter is set so
that the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured only along the Z axis, the axis
(Z) need not be entered.
When the workpiece reference position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shifted
from the top by the cutting allowance), enter the shift amount (S in the following figure) with the
numeric keys and press the <MEASURE> soft key.
S
8 To measure the offset for the next workpiece, move the tool away from the current workpiece and
repeat the operations from step 5.
241
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
(b) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis using
a reference surface
Procedures when the workpiece reference position for the X or Y axis is on a surface of the workpiece
is basically the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z
axis, excluding step 4. In step 4, enter the cutter compensation value of the selected tool on the screen
for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. Enter the value with the numeric keys
and press the <TL_INP> soft key. When entering the cutter compensation value, be careful of the sign
of the value.
Prefix the value with when the measurement surface is located in the positive direction from the tool.
Prefix the value with + when the measurement surface is located in the negative direction from the tool.
(c) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis using
a reference hole
1 Attach the measuring probe with a sensor to the spindle.
2 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode.
3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the opera-
tors panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that
for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinks
at the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the work-
piece reference position is completed.
4 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. The
cursor can be on an offset value other than one along the X or Y axis.
5 Move the measuring probe by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the
inside wall of the hole. The probe can be moved only along one axis at a time.
6 When the sensor detects that the probe has touched the wall, the probe stops moving. The posi-
tion where the probe stops is stored as the first measurement point. The machine coordinates
of the stored measurement point are displayed at the bottom right of the CRT screen as shown
in the figure below.
7 Move the probe to the second measurement point. At this time, the control unit inhibits the probe
from moving in the direction it was moved immediately before. For example, when moving the
probe after moving it in the +X direction until it touches the current measurement point, move-
ments in the X, +Y, and Y directions are allowed but movement in the +X direction is inhibited
until the probe moves away from the inside wall of the hole. This also applies after the probe
touches the second measurement point.
8 After making the probe touch the third measurement point, press the MEASURE soft key then the
<CENTER> soft key.
The coordinates of the center are calculated from the coordinates of the three measured points,
and the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X axis or Y axis is set. To stop the
measurement midway and restart the operation, reset the control unit. Resetting the control unit
clears all stored coordinates of the measurement points.
242
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
SETTING
SETTING SETTING
SETTING
243
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
14" CRT SETTING chapter selection keys
GEN OPERAT MACRO TOOL
HANDY
ERAL PANLE VAR LIFE
NOTE Ignoring the Zaxis means that the third axis is in the machine lock state even if the third axis
is not the Zaxis.
244
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
On the 9 screen, up to 7 numbers of the groups for which tool change signals are issued are displayed at the
bottom of the screen. On the 14 screen, up to 15 numbers are displayed. If there are more than 7 groups on
the 9 screen or 15 groups on the 14 screen, an arrow appears.
If the option for 1024 tool life management groups is used, up to 6 numbers of the groups for which tool change
signals are issued are displayed along the bottom of the tool life screen (13 numbers when the 14 screen is
being used).
For information on a specified group, enter the group number and press <INPNO.>. The page on which the
group starts is displayed. (When the specified group is already displayed, the cursor moves to the life counter
for the group.)
Press <> or <> for information on the previous or next group.
Pressing <> or < >moves the cursor to the life counter for the previous or next group. When the cursor
is on the first or last group on the screen, the page changes.
NOTE <CANCEL> is accepted only in the RESET status. (It is not, however, accepted during the
RESET process.)
245
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
246
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
NOTE The reset operation is valid only when the CNC is in the reset status (excluding during the reset
process). When the group which has been reset is specified again, the first tool is selected.
247
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
NEXT GRP: Number of the group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 command
is executed
USE GRP: Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored
SLCT GRP: Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored or was monitored last
TYPE: 1 (when the tool life is in terms of the number of times the tool is used)
2 (when the tool life is in terms of the duration of use)
LIFE: The life of the tool
COUNT: The elapsed life of the tool
STATE: The state of the tool
Tool state Used Not used
Usable @ Blank
Skipped # # The underscore indicates that the special
character is displayed in reverse.
The tool life
@ / * (Note) *
has expired
NOTE The EMD bit of parameter No. 7401 determines whether the asterisks is displayed when the
next tool is used or when the tool life has expired.
248
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
NOTE 1 Do not edit a group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 command is
executed or a group whose tool life is currently being monitored.
An attempt to edit such a group forcibly terminates the tool management for the group.
NOTE 2 Editing tool life data may turn on or off a tool change signal.
1 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, press the <INPUT> soft key, enter the value, and
press the <EXEC> soft key.
2 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, enter the value, and press the <INPUT> soft key.
NOTE 1 Changing the tool life or the elapsed tool life does not affect the state of the tool or tool change
signal.
NOTE 2 When the type of tool life data is changed, reset the tool life value and the elapsed tool life.
249
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
NOTE The cursor does not move until the tool number is set.
250
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
1 Skipping a tool
Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be skipped, press the <STATE>
soft key, then press the <SKIP> soft key.
2 Clearing tool life data (resetting the life)
Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be cleared, press the <STATE>
soft key, then press the <CLEAR> soft key.
(4) Overriding the elapsed tool life
When the life of the tools in a group is in terms of duration of use, the elapsed tool life can be overridden.
The override factor is specified by a switch on the machine operators panel.
The override factor ranges from 0 to 99.9. When 0 is specified, the tool life is not monitored.
Set the LFV bit of parameter No. 7401 to enable the override switch.
Example When the override factor is 0.1 and it takes ten minutes to cut the workpiece, one minute is
added to the elapsed tool life.
NOTE The elapsed tool life is not updated when the actual cutting time is less than four seconds.
However, when the TRV bit of parameter No.7401 is set to 1, outting time loss than four
seconds is counted as four seconds (two or three seconds are counted as four seconds).
251
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
The screen for generalpurpose switches is shown above. The user can allocate eight signals on this
screen. A name consisting of up to eight characters can be assigned to each signal by a parameter.
252
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
4 Position the cursor (represented by a solid box) on the desired switch using the cursor keys (<>
<>).
5 Position the cursor on the desired status using the cursor keys (<> <>). (The selected statuses
are displayed in reverse.)
(2) Jog feed (available only for the small 9 CRT/MDI unit)
1 Display the software operators panel screen using the soft keys.
2 Select the JOG mode.
3 Perform jog feed by pressing one of the arrow keys.
Pressing the key together with an arrow key jogs the machine at
t
EOB
CAUTION When the CRT displays a screen other than the software operators panel screen, jog feed
is disabled.
NOTE The axis and direction corresponding to each arrow key are set by parameters No. 2020 and
2021.
NOTE 1 The unused switches refer to those which specified as unused by bits 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
of parameter No.7603.
NOTE 2 General-purpose switches 1 to 8 are assumed to be unused when all corresponding bits of
parameter Nos. 2311 to 2318, 2321 to 2328, . . . , and 2381 to 2388 (parameters to name
switches) are 0.
Example The screens when the parameters shown in Table 1 are set are shown on the following pages:
253
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
254
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
SIGNAL 1 : OFF 0N
255
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
After pressing the <OFFSET> key, press the <CHAPTER> key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection
keys. Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool data screen.
9" CRT function selection keys
256
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
(a) The numbers displayed in the NO. column are called display numbers. The display numbers are used
for editing or searching for tool data.
The display numbers, however, may change when tool data is deleted or inserted.
(b) The 3digit number preceded by E: on the second line of the above example indicates the display
number of the tool data for which compensation is currently enabled (after an M06 command).
The 3digit number preceded by S: indicates the display number of the selected tool data (before an
M06 command).
When machining is executed or there is no selected tool, *** is displayed.
(c) * is displayed before a pot number when the same pot number is set.
(d) Data positions which are not set become blanks.
(e) When there is no registered data or before about 15 seconds elapse after the power is turned on, dis-
play number 001 is *** and other data positions are blanks.
(f) On a 14 CRT, the above example is displayed on the left, the items related to (b) are in the center,
and the current position (relative coordinates) is on the right.
(VALUE)
EXEC
257
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
(VAL
UE)
EXEC
(2) T codes
1 Press the [operation menu] key.
2 A new T code can be inserted under the current cursor position using the insert command.
Press the soft keys <INSERT>, <(T#)>, then <EXEC>.
VINSERTWT1030VEXECW
3 After pressing <(T#)> (or entering T), enter the T code to be inserted. A warning is issued when 300
data sets are already registered or the same T code exists.
258
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
4 When <EXEC> is pressed without entering a T code number (only T is entered), a T code is not set
but only the area is allocated.
Example T1234, <EXEC>: 1234 is inserted in the T_CODE column.
T, <EXEC>: Only the area is inserted leaving the T_CODE column blank.
9" CRT operation selectionkeys
(T#)
EXEC
(T#)
EXEC
259
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
(No.) <CRSR>
EXEC , (No.)
EXEC
<CRS
(No.)
R>
EXEC ,(No.)
EXEC
260
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
EXEC
BOT
(NO.) (T#) (P#)
TOM
EXEC
261
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
ALL-AXE (AXIS)
NOTE 1 The floating reference position is stored when the power is turned off.
NOTE 2 The stored floating reference position (machine coordinates) can be checked on the parameter
screen. (The data is stored in parameter No. 1244.)
262
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
10.16 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor
Screen
The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and
spindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE>
hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key. The servo motor and spindle motor can thereby be
easily set or adjusted.
X AXIS Z AXIS
INITIAL SET BITS 00000011 00000011
MOTOR ID NO. 12 12
AMR 00011111 00011111
CMR 2 2
FEEDGEAR N 2 2
(N/M) M 3 3
DIRECTION SET 111 111
VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8000 8000
POSITION PULSE NO. 8000 8000
REF. COUNTER 8000 8000
The correspondence between the items on the screen and the parameters are as follows:
INITIAL SET BITS : Parameter No. 1804
MOTOR ID NO. : Parameter No. 1874
AMR : Parameter No. 1806
CMR : Parameter No. 1820
FEEDGEAR N : Parameter No. 1977
(N/M) M : Parameter No. 1978
DIRECTION SET : Parameter No. 1879
VELOCITY PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1876
POSITION PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1891
REF. COUNTER : Parameter No. 1896
NOTE The servo setting screen is available only to the servo axes. It is not available to the spindle
positioning axis and Cs contouring control axis.
263
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
X AXIS
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
FUNC. BIT 00110100 ALARM 1 00110100
LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00110100
TUNING ST. 1 ALARM 3 00000000
SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000
INT. GAIN 251 LOOP GAIN 3000
PROP. GAIN 2460 POS ERROR 100
FILTER 2450 CURRENT % 5
VELOC. GAIN % 150 SPEED(RPM) 50
The correspondence between the items on the screen and parameters are as follows:
FUNC. BIT : Parameter No. 1808
LOOP GAIN : Parameter No. 1825
SET PERIOD : Parameter No. 1972
INT. GAIN : Parameter No. 1855
PROP. GAIN : Parameter No. 1856
FILTER : Parameter No. 1895
264
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
GEAR SELECT :1
SPINDLE :S11
(PARAMETER)
GEAR RATIO 50
MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000
MAX CS AXIS SPEED 100
MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
GEAR SELECT : Displays one of the following modes depending on the states of control input
signals CTH1 and CTH2.
CTH1 CTH2 Mode Display
0 0 HIGH GEAR 4
0 1 MIDIUM HIGH GEAR 3
1 0 MEDIUM LOW GEAR 2
1 1 LOW GEAR 1
MAX SPINDLE SPEED : Displays the value obtained from the gear ratio and maximum
rotation speed of the motor. The cursor does not move to this item.
265
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
PARAMETER : Displays one of the following parameter numbers according to the gear selection
and operating mode.
<During normal operation>
HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Proportional gain 3040 3040 3041 3041
Integrated gain 3048 3048 3049 3049
Motor voltage 3083 3083 3083 3083
Generative power 3080 3080 3080 3080
<During CS control>
HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Proportional gain 3046 3046 3047 3047
Integrated gain 3054 3054 3055 3055
Loop gain 3069 3070 3071 3072
Motor voltage 3086 3086 3086 3086
ZRN gain (%) 3092 3092 3092 3092
Reference position shift 3135 3135 3135 3135
266
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
<During orientation>
HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Proportional gain 3042 3042 3043 3043
Integrated gain 3050 3050 3051 3051
Loop gain 3060 3061 3062 3063
Motor voltage 3084 3084 3084 3084
ORAR gain (%) 3064 3064 3064 3064
Stop position shift 3077 3077 3077 3077
Reference position shift 3031 3031 3031 3031
Motor speed : Displays the speed of the spindle motor. (Unit: RPM)
Spindle speed : Displays the speed of the spindle. (Unit: RPM)
Feedrate : Displays the feedrate of the spindle. (Unit: DEG/MIN)
Position deviation S1 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the first unit.
Position deviation S2 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the second unit.
Synchronous error : Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation be-
tween the spindle and Z axis during rigid tapping.
Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation be-
tween the main spindle and subspindle during synchronous control. Peak
hold values can be displayed by setting the PKHD bit of parameter No. 5820.
NOTE When the second spindle is displayed during orientation or CS control, position deviation S2
is displayed.
267
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
ALARM : Displays one of the following according to the spindle alarm number:
268
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
CONTROL INPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on.
CONTROL OUTPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on.
269
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
10.16.3 Operations
The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and
spindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE>
hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key.
1 Press the [function menu] key.
2 Press the <SERVICE> soft or hard key.
9" CRT function selection keys
3 Pressing the <SERVO> key displays the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen.
Pressing the <SPINDLE> key displays the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle
monitor screen.
9" CRT SERVICE selection keys
270
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Press the <SV_SET> key to select the servo setting screen. Press the <SV_TUN> key to select the
servo adjustment screen.
b) Spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen
9" CRT SPINDLE operation selection keys
Press the <SP_SET> key to select the spindle setting screen. Press the <SP_TUN> key to select the
spindle adjustment screen. Press the <SP_MON> key to select the spindle monitor screen.
271
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
On a single main screen, up to five subscreens can be displayed. Information describing a displayed sub-
screen (data items, displayed position, and size) is stored. These items need not be specified each time the
power is turned on. (Information on subscreens for up to all 30 main screens can be stored.)
272
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
The frame is
displayed in white.
S8
> >
EDIT EDIT
Soft keys for the main screen Soft keys for the main screen
Sn
RETURN
Sn MAIN
The frame is
displayed in green.
By pressing the following keys, the
subscreen state can be changed. For
details, see the next section.
Sn >
Subscreen
EDIT
3 :WORK OFFSET
NO. 02 (G55)
X 10.000
Y 20.000
Z 30.000
273
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
1 2 3 4
The five soft keys on the left are displayed according to the data displayed on the subscreen (position, tool
compensation, etc.). (Shown above are the soft keys displayed for the subscreen for the offset from the
workpiece reference point.) The four soft keys on the right are used for subscreen operation. Use the sub-
screen operation keys as described below:
1 <MOVE/ENLARG>
When this key is pressed, the subscreen can be moved, enlarged, or reduced. After this key is
pressed, the following soft keys are displayed.
SET
END
Keys for moving the subscreen Keys for enlarging or Key for
(displayed in yellow) reducing the subscreen terminating setting
(displayed in red)
274
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
2 <RETURN MAIN>
After this key is pressed, subscreens are still displayed, but data in them cannot be edited. Only data
on the main screen can be edited. The soft keys for the subscreens are substituted by the soft keys
for the main screen.
3 <DELETE SCREEN>
When this key is pressed, the subscreen is erased. Subsequently, only data on the main screen can
be edited. The soft keys for the subscreen are substituted by the soft keys for the main screen. This
key erases only a subscreen in the edit status. To delete all subscreens, press the <SHIFT> key and
enter 8 as described above.
4 <SELECT SCREEN>
When this key is pressed, the data to display on a subscreen can be selected. After this key is pressed,
the subscreen menu is displayed as shown below.
Select an option by using the cursor keys (<> , <>, <>,<> ) and pressing the <SET END> soft
key. Selected data is displayed on the subscreen.
275
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
To select the part to be changed, press the cursor keys (<> , <>, <> , <> ).
To select the type of position data, press the page keys ( <>, <> ).
If the subscreen is in the edit status, the origin/preset operation can be performed for position data to be
changed as well as for position data on the main screen.
(2) PROGRAM subscreen
Indicates the current program. The subscreen can be enlarged or reduced. The program cannot be edited
on the subscreen.
1:PROGRAM
O100 ;
N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ;
N2 C90. ;
N3 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ;
N4 Y20. ;
> N5 X0 ;
N6 G40 Y0 ;
N7 M30 ;
%
276
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
1:TOOL OFFSET
001 1.234
002 5.678
003 0.000
1:TOOL OFFSET
NO. GEOMETRY WEAR
001 1.234 5.678
002 10.000 20.000
1:TOOL OFFSET
(LENGTH) (RADIUS)
NO. GEOMETRY WEAR GEOMETRY WEAR
001 1.234 2.345 3.456 4.567
002 10.000 20.000 30.000 40.000
1:WORK OFFSET
NO.00 (COMMON) NO.01 (G55)
X 0.000 X 10.000
Y 0.000 Y 20.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
NO.01 (G54) NO.01 (G56)
X 1.234 X 30.000
Y 5.678 Y 40.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
1:MODAL
G90 G54
G01 G80
G17 G64
G40 G43
D10 H20
F 10.
S 100
1:DI/DO
000 00110011 003 00100000
001 00000011 004 00101000
002 00000000 005 00000000
1:SERVO ERROR
X 55
Y 0
Z 0
C 0
277
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
1:ALARM MESSAGE
PS010 IMPROPER GCODE
1:OPERATOR MESSAGE
MC012 ALARM OCCURS
278
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
NOTE When a subscreen is deleted, the displayed data, position, and size of the subscreen are
stored. The subscreen is redisplayed as it was before deletion.
(4) To change the value of G56 on the WORK OFFSET subscreen or subscreen 3, follow the procedure below:
1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <3>.
2) Press the page keys and cursor keys to move the cursor to a desired position.
3) Enter a value and press the <INPUT> key.
4) Press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.
(5) To delete all subscreens, do the following:
1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <8>.
(6) To redisplay subscreens, do the following:
1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <9>.
Setting input
(1) This function can be used with a 14inch or 10inch CRT (it cannot be used with a 9inch CRT).
(2) This function can be used with the M or T system (it cannot be used with the TT system).
(3) When the current program is displayed on the main screen, the program subscreen cannot be displayed.
279
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
NOTE 1 The information related to the RS232C and RS422 channels is displayed only when the reader/
punch interface B option has been specified.
NOTE 2 Page 2 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.
280
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
NOTE 1 Page 2 is displayed only when the reader/punch interface B option has been specified.
NOTE 2 Page 3 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.
281
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
NOTE 1 Only the values that fall in the following valid setting range can be selected.
NOTE 2 The parameters can be specified regardless of what the current mode is.
282
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
2 Remote buffer
RS232C RS422
1200 1200
2400 2400
4800 4800
9600 9600
19200 19200
38400
76800
86400
(i) For the remote buffer, protocol B, extended protocol B, or protocol A can be select.
283
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
10.18.3 Notes
(1) The device specification, stop bit, and baud rate parameters for RS232 channels 1 to 3 are determined
according to parameter Nos. 5001 to 5003, and those for the RS422, according to parameter No.5013.
If a value other than 1 to 6 is specified for parameter No.5001, 5002, 5003, or 5013, the device specifica-
tion, stop bit, and baud rate corresponding to the parameter is blanked. If the cursor is placed at the blank,
the following message corresponding to each channel appears in the simplified help message frame below
the menu.
Channel 1:
Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5001.
Channel 2:
Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5002.
Channel 3:
Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5003.
RS422:
Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5013.
1) 14 CRT
284
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
2) 9 CRT
(2) If protocol A is selected for the remote buffer, or if the protocol is switched from A to B or extended B, the
power must be switched off and on again.
Similarly, if the stop bit or baud rate for the RS232C or RS422 for the remote buffer, or parameter No.5070
is changed with protocol A selected, the change becomes effective only after the power is switched off and
on again.
285
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
*1 Asterisks are displayed in the entry field for a parameter dedicated to high-precision
contour control or RISC.
286
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
*1 The 9-inch CRT display does not contain simple help messages at
the bottom of the setting screen.
287
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
288
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Execution parameter
MEDIUM
Parameter 1478
Parameter 1544
ROUGH
Parameter 1564
Fig. 10.19.3 When the Difference in Feedrate at Corners Is Input in Each Mode
(FINE Parameters are Active)
(3) [INPUT]
When parameters for each axis, including the parameter for the time constant after interpolation, are set
on the screen, these values are converted so that they conform to the units of measurement for each axis,
then they are input for each axis.
To set parameters separately for each axis, enter data in parameters on the parameter screen.
Press the <AUX> key to display parameter numbers. It is possible to change the screen page according
to the displayed parameter number for the necessary parameter setting.
(4) [AUX]
When the <AUX> key is pressed, parameter numbers are displayed. To cancel this state, press the <AUX>
key again. The previous screen is redisplayed.
When the automatic tuning function is used, a window may be opened to display a message for a calculation
result. While the window is open, all operations are disabled. Press the <AUX> key to close the window.
Changing the screen clears parameter numbers and closes any open message window.
289
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
FINE LEVEL
Maximum feedrate (Same setting regardless of the mode)
Time constant before interpolation
Loop gain for the servo (parameter 1825) (Same setting regardless of the mode)
All values except for the servo loop gain can be specified on the tuning screen. When the above parame-
ters are not set, a message window is opened to indicate that calculation is not impossible.
Messages concerning the results of automatic calculation may also be displayed.
Press the <AUX> key to close the window.
The automatic setting function can be disabled with the NAS bit of parameter 1517.
CAUTION The automatic tuning function is only used to set standard values. Actual error is a slightly
different from the error calculated during setting due to servo system delay.
290
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Execution
FINE MEDIUM ROUGH
parameter No.
FINE LEVEL 1520 1540 1560 None
ACC/DEC LEVEL 1521 1541 1561 None
MAX FEED 1630 1640 1660 1630
TCONST FOR BIPL 1523 1543 1563 1631
TCONST FOR AIPL 1522 1542 1562 1635(*1)
1482(*2)
1622(*3)
CORNER FEED 1524 1544 1564 1478
CLAMP BY ACC(*4) 1525 1545 1565 1643
(CIRCLE FEED CLAMP)
RADIUS 1526 1546 1566 1492
MAX FEED 1527 1547 1567 1490
MIN FEED 1528 1548 1568 1491
Level 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Coefficient 2.00 1.67 1.43 1.25 1.11 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.50
[MAX FEED] This parameter determines the rate of the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation.
The acceleration/deceleration before interpolation depends on this parameter and
the time constant.
Acceleration is calculated by dividing [MAX FEED] by [TCONST FOR BIPL].
Because of this, it is not necessary to specify the maximum feedrate in this parameter.
This parameter is common to all three machining modes.
[TCONST FOR BIPL] This parameter determines the rate the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
The parameter specifies the time that elapses until [MAX FEED] is obtained.
[MAX FEED] is common to the three machining modes (FINE, MEDIUM, and
ROUGH). The degrees of acceleration in each mode can be checked with the setting
of the [TCONST FOR BIPL] parameter.
[CORNER FEED] When the difference in the feedrate between two blocks is greater than the feedrate
specified in this parameter, the tool decelerates to this feedrate.
The smaller the setting of this parameter, the higher the precision. Although this
reduces potential damage to the machine, more time is required for machining.
[CLAMP BY ACC] This parameter is enabled only when the highprecision contour control and RISC
options are provided. When an acceleration greater than the acceleration specified
in this parameter is applied to blocks, the tool decelerates to the specified acceleration
or slower.
The greater the setting of the parameter, the smaller the allowable acceleration.
291
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
This enables high precision machining and reduces potential damage to the machine.
This parameter has a default value of the same acceleration as for acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation during automatic tuning.
[RADIUS] This parameter is used to clamp the feedrate according to the radius of an arc.
The acceleration is calculated with [MAX FEED] according to the radius specified in
the parameter.
[MAX FEED] Specify the maximum allowable feedrate for the radius specified in the above
parameter.
The default value of the maximum feedrate is calculated during automatic tuning so
that the same acceleration as that for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
applied to the tool.
[MIN FEED] Specify the minimum feedrate at which the feedrate is clamped.
[FEED FORWARD] Specify a feedforward factor.
Do not change this parameter in a state other than the emergency stop state.
CAUTION 2 When the deceleration ratio for the rotation axis is too high
An overflow occurs in the servo software during calculation for feedforward. An alarm may
also occur for the rotation axis immediately after automatic tuning, indicating an incorrect
digital parameter. In this case, set the bit of the following parameter to 1 for the axis.
For the description of the parameter, refer to the servo maintenance manual.
292
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Press the<SERVICE> soft key several times to display the HPCC (TUNING) screen.
Press the key < >to display the operation soft keys, then press the <HPCC SET> soft key.
Press the <AUTO TUNE> soft key A message indicating that calculation
and press the <FINE> soft key. is not possible is displayed.
293
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
Operating procedure
1 Press the function menu key so that the function selection soft key display appears.
2 Press the [SERVICE] key several times until the highspeed & highprecision machining screen appears.
Alternatively, press the [CHAPTER] key so that the chapter selection soft key display appears, then press
the [HPCC] key.
3 If the [ACC INPUT] key is displayed, press it to select acceleration input mode. If the [PARAM INPUT] key
is displayed, acceleration input mode has already been selected.
When the input mode is switched from parameter input to acceleration input, some items will be changed
for acceleration input.
NOTE 1 To select acceleration input mode (or parameter input mode), the following conditions must be
satisfied.
Bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8000 = 1, and
1. The current mode is MDI, and key entries are acceptable, or
2. The current state is emergency stop.
NOTE 2 When accelerations are specified, each parameter is calculated automatically according to the
following expression:
Acceleration clamp : Parameter for determining the allowable acceleration used to determine
a speed by acceleration, for highspeed contour control (Nos. 1525,
1545, and 1565)
Reference axis maximum cutting feedrate:
Maximum cutting feedrate along the reference axis (No. 1422)
Clamp acceleration : Acceleration applied in acceleration clamping
Maximum speed : Upper speed limit applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1527,
1547, and 1567)
Radius : Arc radius applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1526, 1546,
and 1566). If 0 is specified, the radius is assumed to be 5 [mm] (for
millimeter machines) or 1 [inch] (for inch machines).
Acceleration : Acceleration applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius
294
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
10.20.1 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or Which Have Already Been
Executed
Display the screen for displaying M codes currently being executed or which have already been executed (M-
CODE DISPLAY screen), as follows:
(1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys.
(2) Press the [PRG _CHK] soft key.
(3) If the M-CODE DISPLAY screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the following
operations:
a. Press the [PRG_CHK] soft key repeatedly until the M-CODE DISPLAY screen appears.
b. Press the [CHAPTER] soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys. Then, press the [M-DISP] soft
key.
[9 CRT Screen]
>
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
CHAPTER+
295
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
The M-CODE field displays the five most recent M codes for each M code group, with the latest on the right.
An M code which is currently being executed in the current block is highlighted. M codes which have al-
ready been executed are displayed in green or by varying the intensity, according to whether a color or
monochrome CRT is being used, respectively.
The five M codes, however, can be displayed only when they are of two-digit format. If M codes using three
or more digits are included, as many of the five M codes as will fit on a line are displayed.
The NAME field displays the name of the last-specified M code for each group.
>
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
CHAPTE
R
[9 CRT Screen]
296
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
>
MEM***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
(b) Press the [MCG-DSP] soft key to display the M codes, found during the search, for each M code group.
Note that these M codes are not displayed on the M-CODE DISPLAY screen described.
[9 CRT Screen]
297
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
To display another set of M code groups, press a page key. The [OVERSTORE] soft key can be used to
output M, S, T, and B codes.
NOTE Pressing the [MCG-DSP] soft key displays the above screen, regardless of the number of axes
under the control of the CNC.
(c) When M codes have been output to the PMC with MDI or overstore, after the search for the program restart
position, the M code which is currently being executed is highlighted and those M codes that have already
been executed are displayed in green or in a different intensity, according to whether a color or mono-
chrome CRT is being used, respectively.
For example, when M13 and M14 have been output after search for the program restart position and M14
is being executed, the screen will appear as follows:
[9 CRT Screen]
298
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
B **
ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)
2) When bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 is 1, the last M code for each M code group found during
the search is output.
Example When the last M code for each group is M03, M14, M21, M30, M40, M102, M111, M120,
M130, and M140 and the last M code (M40) of group 005 is being executed, the screen will
appear as follows:
299
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
CAUTION The last M code data for a group is lost, thus cannot be output, if five or more M codes of
a group have already been output with MDI or overstore.
300
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
[9 CRT SCREEN]
>
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT PUNCH INP_NO +
The M code group number (GROUP) for each M code (CODE) can be set on this screen. The M code
name (NAME) set by a program can also be checked for each M code on this screen. The above
shows an example where M codes are represented using four digits. M codes can be represented
using up to eight digits, depending on the corresponding parameter setting.
M code groups can be set for M00 to M99, and up to 400 additional M codes, numbered starting from
M100, can be specified by the user (see Parameter Manual for an explanation of how to add M codes).
To set the M code group number for an M code, use the cursor keys or the [INP_NO] soft key to move
the cursor to the M code, then enter the group number. M code group numbers can be entered consec-
utively by separating them with a semicolon (;) . M code groups can be numbered from 1 to 127. When
0 is entered, the M code is not registered in an M code group. To display another sets of M
codes, press a page key.
Only 0 can be set for those M codes which call a subprogram, such as M98 and M99. Data can be
entered only when the PWE bit of parameter No.8000 is set to 1. This setting is made from the setting
screen.
A function name of up to 20 characters can be specified uniquely for each M code in the M code name
(NAME) field. M code names, however, cannot be entered directly on the M-CODE GROUP SETTING
screen. See Item, Input/output of M code group numbers and M code names for an explanation of
how to set M code names.
>
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
301
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
NOTE M code names are not displayed on the program/program check screen even when blocks for
specifying M code names are executed.
Example When the following program is executed, M code group 1 and M code name SPINDLE are
set for M03:
G10 L40 P03 R1 (SPINDLE@84647B5F@) ;
The number of characters in parentheses is as follows:
SPINDLE 7 characters
@
8464 ( ) 2 characters 2 pcs (One pair)
7B5F ( ) 2 characters
@
(b) Output to external devices
M code group numbers and M code names can be output, via the RS 232C interface, to external de-
vices such as a Floppy Cassette by pressing the [PUNCH] soft key on the M code group setting
screen.
Data is output in G10 format (described in (1) ), without a program number, with file name M CODE
GROUP.
NOTE The options for the reader/punch interface and programmable data input (G10) must
bespecified.
(3) Notes
(a) Part program length reduces by 45 meters when this option is combined.
302
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Guide key
EXEC (VALUE)
EXEC
303
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
Guide key
EXEC
3 EXEC (VALUE) +
(2) To specify a workpiece offset that makes the current position coincide with a certain point () in the work-
piece coordinate system:
Step 1 Place the cursor on the desired coordinate system axis in the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen.
4 EXEC +
NOTE 1 The CURRENT soft key becomes effective when parameter WZMS (bit 3 of parameter No.
1200) is 1.
NOTE 2 When the cursor is at workpiece zero point offset No.00 (COMMON) , an attempt to manually
specify the workpiece zero point is rejected, and the warning message EXTERNAL
WORKPIECE ZERO NOT INPUT will appear.
304
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
<Example of operation>
(1) When an external workpiece zero point (offset specified at COMMON in WORK ZERO OFFSET
screen) and workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) are specified
1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates:
X100. , Y200.) becomes the zero point of workpiece coordinate system 1
250
D C F
100
50
External workpiece zero point
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point
305
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
2) If an operation (: X-50. , Y-50. in operation (2) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine
coordinates: X100. , Y200. ) coincides with position (X-50. , Y- 50.) in workpiece coordinate system
1
250
A : External workpiece zero point offset
B : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset
C : New G54 workpiece zero point offset
D : Machine coordinate value display
E : Absolute coordinate value before setting
200 G F : Original workpiece coordinate zero point
G : New workpiece coordinate zero point
H : Input value (X-50. , Y-50.)
Current H
position
150
E
100 F
B
50 External workpiece zero point
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point
306
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
250
D
E
F
100
E
C
50 B
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point
307
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
150
100 E D
E
C
50
A
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point
NOTE The absolute coordinates assume that bits 2 (DTL) and 3 (DCR) of parameter No.2202 are
both 1 (either set of coordinates does not include a distance traveled because of tool length
or cutter compensation).
308
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
309
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
14 CRT screen
Parameter WMH (NO. 6003#4) = 0
310
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
(3)
(2) (2)
(1)
+Y
Commands (1), (2), and (3) and used to move the tool along the path indicated in the figure by (1), (2) , and
(3) when parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction.
This function is enabled or disabled by setting the TILE bit of setting parameter No.5201.
311
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
CAUTION 4 When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during manual operation,
the absolute coordinate along the axis is subjected to mirror image conversion relative to
the actual machine movement.
The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the converted absolute
coordinate.
When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during automatic
operation, the absolute coordinate indicates the coordinate specified with the command,
while the machine coordinate and actual machine movement are subject to mirror image
conversion. The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the absolute
coordinate that is not subjected to mirror image conversion.
CAUTION 5 The relationship between the absolute coordinate and the machine coordinate for an axis
is shifted when the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position
exceeds the transverse inhibit limit for the axis or the workpiece coordinate system is set
in an area that exceeds the transverse inhibit limit.
(1) When the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds the
transverse inhibit limit
(a) When parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction,
the current position and inhibit limit will be as follows:
Machine coordinate
Work coordinate
(Absolute coordinate)
(b) The workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds the
transverse inhibit limit (G92 X25.).
Machine coordinate
(i) While the absolute coordinate exceeds the transverse inhibit limit for an axis, only
the absolute coordinate is updated.
The machine coordinate remains as is (the tool does not move).
Machine coordinate
Active position
312
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
(ii) When the absolute coordinate falls within the range of the transverse inhibit limit, the
tool starts moving and the machine coordinate and absolute coordinate along the
axis are updated as follows:
Machine coordinate
NOTE To change the transverse inhibit limit, perform either of the following:
(1) Change setting parameter No.5251 by an MDI operation.
313
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.DISPLAY
DRCTRY
TEXT DIR.MEM and MEMORY is
Programscreen
DIR.MEM key
Page key
Programnumberscreen Programnumberandprogram
+ namescreen
Forthecompact
CRT/MDIpanel
314
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
At the bottom of the program screen, the size of the remaining part program storage space and the number
of programs that can be registered are displayed as follows:
FREE PAGES: 6960 (1272M) FREE FILES: 100
The page is the minimum unit used to store a program in part program storage. One page corresponds to 77
characters (or a part program length of about 0.2 m).
In the example above, the size of remaining space is 193 pages (about 38.6 m), and the number of programs
that can be registered is 39.
When the program number and program name screen displays a program name, up to 16 characters are dis-
played. However, when the option for 48character program name display is selected, up to 48 characters are
displayed as shown below.
Example of display: 14 CRT (18 programs on one screen)
In the case of the 9 CRT, one screen displays the program numbers and names of up to five programs.
NOTE The term page used here is a unit of data in internal memory. It is not related to the size of a
page on the CRT screen.
315
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
316
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
317
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
7 Enter the character string identifying the desired program in the group.
The program names can be as long as desired. However, only the first 48 characters are effective in
the search.
When the programs whose names start with the character string GEAR1000 are to be found, for ex-
ample, enter GEAR1000*. Be sure to append the asterisk, called a wild card, which indicates that
any character string meets the requirements of the search. If the asterisk is omitted, only the programs
whose names consist of the character string GEAR1000 are searched for. A question mark specifies
a single arbitrary character. For example, when ????1000 is entered, the programs whose names
start with four arbitrary characters are searched for.
8 Press the <EXEC> key.
9 The screen changes to the group directory screen, which displays a directory of programs whose
names contain the specified character string.
When no program whose name contains the specified character string is found, the message DATA
NOT FOUND is displayed.
10 If a directory of programs occupies more than one page, use the page keys to scroll the pages.
11 Unless the power is turned off, a directory of programs in a group continues to be stored until a search
is done for another group. After switching from the group directory screen to another screen, the direc-
tory of programs in the group previously searched can be displayed again. This operation is per-
formed using the procedure below.
i) Press the function menu key, then press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.
ii) Switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys by pressing the <PROGRAM> soft key or
<PROG> hard key repeatedly or by pressing the <CHAPTER> key. Then, press the <DIR.MEM>
key to select the program number and program name screen.
iii) Press the <OPERATION SELECTION> key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
iv) Press the <DIR.GRP> key.
v) Press the <PRVGRP> key.
vi) The screen switches to the group directory screen and displays the directory of the programs in
the group previously searched.
Therefore, when the group directory screen is to be displayed again after switching to another
screen, the character string included in the programs of the group need not be reentered.
318
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(PROG#)
319
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
1 40
The status display line contains nine fields, (1) to (9). On all CNC screens, the status items listed below are
displayed.
(1) Automatic operation mode selection (MEM, MDI, TAPE, EDIT, or ****)
This field displays the automatic operation mode currently selected. When no automatic operation mode
is selected, **** is displayed.
(2) Manual operation mode selection (JOG, HND, INC, AGJ, J+REF, or ***)
This field displays the manual operation mode currently selected. When no manual operation mode is se-
lected, **** is displayed.
(3) Automatic operation status (RESET, STOP, HOLD, STRT, MSTR, or SRCH)
This field displays the status of automatic operation.
RSET : Reset is in progress.
STOP : Automatic operation is stopped.
HOLD : Automatic operation is suspended.
STRT : Automatic operation is started.
MSTR : Execution of a manual numeric command is started.
NSRC : Sequence number search is in progress.
(4) Program editing status (READ, PNCH, VRFY, SRCH, COND, EDIT, or ****)
This field displays the status of program editing.
READ : Registration is in progress.
PNCH : Punchout is in progress.
VRFY : Verification is in progress.
SRCH : Search is in progress.
COND : Memory arrangement is in progress.
EDIT : An editing operation (such as insertion or alteration) is in progress.
**** : No editing operation is in progress,
(5) Axis movement/dwell status (MTN, DWL, or ***)
This field displays MTN during movement along an axis, and displays DWL when the machine is dwelling.
This field displays *** in other cases.
(6) M/S/T/B function status (FIN or ***)
This field displays FIN when a miscellaneous function such as M, S, T, and B is being performed (that is,
when the system is waiting for a completion signal from the PMC). In other cases, this field displays ***.
(5) (6) Emergency stop status (EMG)
If an emergency stop occurs, the display of (5) and (6) disappears and the character string EMG is dis-
played in reverse, instead.
320
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
321
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
322
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
ORIGIN RESET
ALL-AXIS (AXIS)
(AXIS)
(AXIS)
323
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
ALL-AXIS (AXIS)
5 The cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset are cancelled, and the origin of
the selected workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) is preset at the position offset from the origin
of the machine coordinate system by the workpiece reference point offset. As a result, the current posi-
tion (in absolute coordinates) in the workpiece coordinate system are the values obtained by subtract-
ing the workpiece reference point offset from the machine coordinates.
Whether to preset relative position display as with absolute coordinates is specified by the DSE bit of
parameter No. 2202.
324
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Operator
message
9" CRT message chapter selection keys
ALARM OPERATOR +
Alarm
message 14" CRT notice chapter selection keys
ALAR OPER
M ATOR
325
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Alarm
message 14" CRT notice chapter selection keys
ALAR OPER
M ATOR
326
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(ii) The O, N, F, S, and T values of the program being draw and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate
system are displayed.
(iii) Drawing can be performed in an arbitrary plane. Threedimensional drawing is possible as well as bi
plane drawing.
Z Y Y
Z
X Y Z X
X
Drawing in an
arbitrary plane Three-dimensional drawing Bi-plane drawing
Z
Horizontal rotation
Vertical rotation
X Y
(v) Parameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, and Z.
The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of the axes on
the CRT screen.
(vi) A graphic on the screen can be shifted and enlarged.
Enlargement
Current screen New screen
Shift
327
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> .
The cursor keys <> and <> move the cursor horizontally.
The cursor keys <> and <> move the cursor vertically.
4 To set a parameter, enter the desired data then press the <INPUT> key.
5 To return to the graphic screen after setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> key.
328
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Z
Y Z X
XY YZ ZX XYZ
X Y Z
X Y
Y
X Y Z
YX ZY XZ XZY
Y Z X
Z X
Y
XYZ2
X
(Bi-plane graphic)
Z
X
Z
X
Y 30,
180,
X Y
f:Represents the resultant XYZ coordinates.
329
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
X Y
Parameter No. 4832 can rotate the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameter
is set to 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen.
330
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Drawing plane: XZY
Rotation angle (horizontal)= +20
Rotation angle (vertical) = +10
Parameter No. 4832 = +65
Y Y
65
Initial vertical
X rotation axis
10
20 20
Z X
Z X
331
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Screen
10% 10%
332
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
In the case of a biplane drawing on the XYZ2 graphic plane, when the ratio of the difference between
the maximum and minimum values set for the Yaxis to the difference between those set for the Zaxis
exceeds 1:2 or 2:1, the screen allocation is clamped to 1:2 or 2:1.
Screen
Y
1
Z X
If the ratio of the difference between the maximum and minimum values set for the Zaxis to the differ-
ence between those set for the Yaxis is greater than 2, the screen is divided as shown above.
In the case of the drawing plane XYZ or XZY, the scale factor is determined so that the rectangular
parallelepiped determined by the set maximum and minimum values always fits in the screen when
rotated horizontally by any angle.
10% 10%
Parallelepiped determined
by the set maximum and
minimum values
333
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(g) Notes
(i) Specify positional values in mm or inches.
(ii) The parameter scale factor, the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, and the CRT
center are independent of data defining the graphic screen and data displayed on the screen for
making alterations. This is to make it easier to return to the original screen after a graphic enlarge-
ment or shift operation. Usually, graphic data matches the settings. After a graphic enlargement
or shift operation, however, the graphic data changes, resulting in a mismatch with the settings.
In such a case, @ is prefixed to the setting.
When the <AFTER SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the graphic data is transferred to the settings (A
in the figure below). When the <BEFORE SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the settings are transferred
to the graphic data (B in the figure below.)
A
B
NOTE When enlarging a graphic, the red and yellow cursors are used to change the maximum and
minimum values. When shifting a graphic, the RELATIVE SCALE field is used to change the
scale factor parameter, and the red cursor is used to change the center coordinate data.
(iii) The graphic parameters are not cleared even when the power is turned off.
334
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
335
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
SCALE FACTOR
336
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
NOTE 1 Reduction is not allowed. For reduction, use the RELATIVE SCALE field for the graphic shift
operation.
NOTE 2 After graphic shift or enlargement, the graphic parameter screen may display an at sign (@).
This means that graphic data set for shifting or enlarging a graphic does not match the setting
on the graphic parameter screen.
NOTE 3 When two planes are selected, the plane containing the red cursor (J) is subject to
enlargement.
337
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
338
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(b) The DIRECTORY screen can also be selected by pressing the function selection key <PRO-
GRAM>, then pressing the chapter selection key <DIR.FLP>.
DELETE
READ PUNCH SRH_FIL TEXT +
FILE
TOP (FILE#) +
(b) To display a directory starting with a particular file, press the operation guidance key <(FILE#)>,
enter the desired file number, then press the <EXEC> key.
TOP (FILE#) +
EXEC +
(4) The files listed on the previous pages can be displayed by scrolling the pages.
NOTE The directory display is cleared when the mode or screen is changed. To return to the directory
display, perform the above operation again.
339
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
340
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
NOTE 1 Set the numbers of the axes whose load is to be displayed in parameter Nos. 2231 to 2333.
Set the rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter in parameter Nos. 2234 to
2237. When the applied load reaches the rated load, the load meter indicates 100%.
NOTE 2 Load meter data is displayed using a bar graph and percentages. The range of the bar graph
is 0% to 200%. 100% is indicated by a change in color on the 14 screen or a change in
brightness on the 9 CRT screen.
NOTE 3 The 14 CRT screen displays a graph indicating the fluctuations in load over one minute. One
screen displays the fluctuations for one load meter. The cursor keys <> and <> can be
used to select the load meter for which this type of graph is to be displayed.
341
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
3 Select the MDI mode, then move the cursor to the cumulative parts count field with the cursor keys. Enter
the desired preset value with the numeric keys, then press the [INPUT] key.
Similarly, the number of parts required can be preset. When 0 is set as the number of parts required, the
number of parts required is assumed to be infinite. The total cumulative parts count cannot be preset on
this screen. Use the parameter screen to preset the total cumulative parts count.
4 To alter the cumulative automatic operation time, cumulative cutting time, and cumulative time recorded
with an arbitrary timer for each machine, move the cursor to the corresponding hours (H), minutes (M), and
seconds (S) fields with the cursor keys, then enter the desired values.
NOTE 1 Custom macro system variables can be used to write to or read from the cumulative parts count
field and the field for the number of parts required.]
Cumulative parts count: #3901
Number of parts required: #3902
NOTE 2 Specifying DTIM, bit 5 of parameter No. 7620, appropriately enables the accumulated values
of poweron time, automatic operation time, cutting time, and time recorded on the timer which
can be used for any purposes, to be displayed in units of days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
342
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.11 Clock
The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on each CRT screen. The clock display screen
displays the current date and time in year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds. The clock display screen
enables the current time to be set.
The current date and time (year/month/day/hours/minutes/seconds) can also be read using custom macros
or the PMC window.
(1) Display
The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on the status display line of each CRT screen.
The clock display screen displays the current date and time as the year, month, day, hours, minutes, and
seconds.
1 Press the function menu key to
switch the soft keys to the func-
tion selection keys.
2 Press the [SETTING] soft or
hard key.
When the current screen is not the clock display screen, the clock display screen can be displayed
in one of two ways:
i) Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key repeatedly until the clock display screen appears.
ii) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the
[TIMER] key.
343
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
9" CRT setting chapter selection keys
TIMER
9" CRT clock operation selection keys
INPUT +INPUT
14" CRT setting chapter selection keys
HANDY GEN OPERAT MACRO TOOL SER MES TIMER CHAP
ERAL PANEL VAR. LIFE VICE SAGE TER
14" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT +INPUT
(2) Setting
The clock display screen is used to set the time.
1 Display the clock display screen. (See Item (1) above.)
2 Move the cursor to the desired field.
3 Enter the desired value, then press the [INPUT] key.
NOTE When specifying the year, enter only the last two digits. Negative values and values greater
than the maximum value above cannot be specified.
Example When the current date and time is 17 minutes 5 seconds past 4 p.m. on May 20, 1987
#3011: 19870520
#3012: 161705
344
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.12.1 Overview
The background graphic display has the function described below.
Tool path drawing: This function draws the path of the tool center specified by a part program.
The tool path drawing function represents the path of the tool as lines to allow the part program to be closely
checked.
(1) Notes
(a) For a program stored in memory, the tool path is drawn in the background (background drawing).
(b) The tool path can be drawn along the Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis, and axes parallel to these axes. The
tool path cannot be drawn along a rotary axis, PMC axis, or so forth.
(c) The tool path can be drawn for the functions listed below.
G00: Positioning
G01: Linear interpolation
G02/G03: Circular interpolation
G17/G18/G19: Plane selection
G90/G91: Absolute/incremental data input
G40/G41/G42: Cutter compensation/cancel
G43/G44/G49: Tool length compensation/cancel
G50/G51: Scaling/cancel
G50.1/G51.1: Programmable mirror image/cancel
G68/G69: Coordinate system rotation/cancel
G72.1/G72.1: Figure copy
G52: Local coordinate system setting
G92: Workpiece coordinate system change
G92.1: Workpiece coordinate system presetting
G73/G74/G76/G80/G81/G82/G83/G84/G85/G86/G87/G88/G98/G99: Canned cycle/cancel
G65: Macro call
M98: Subprogram call
Optionalangle chamfering/corner rounding
Custom macros (with some restrictions)
(d) When the ordinary graphic display option is also installed, you can enable background graphics by
setting bit 2 of parameter No. 10 to 1.
345
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(2) Features
The tool path drawing function draws the path of the center of a tool. The function has the features listed
below.
(a) Highspeed drawing
Compared with graphic display A, a tool path is drawn at higher speed, thus allowing a faster NC pro-
gram check.
(b) Partially enlarged drawing
While viewing a drawn tool path, the user can specify a partial enlargement center and relative scale
factor (graphic shift) or diagonal points (graphic enlargement). So, a required portion can be enlarged
using simple operations.
(c) Threedimensional drawing
In addition to twodimensional graphics, threedimensional graphics can be drawn. A graphic can
be rotated horizontally and vertically.
(d) Biplane drawing
Two planes, the XY plane and XZ plane, can be drawn at the same time.
(e) Scale display (plane drawing and biplane drawing), or coordinate axis and reference dimension dis-
play (threedimensional drawing)
Each screen displays a ruler for plane drawing and biplane drawing, or coordinate axis and dimen-
sions for threedimensional drawing, so that the dimensions of each graphic can be determined cor-
rectly.
(f) Colors for rapid traverse and cutting feed paths
Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path.
(g) Position display
The O, N, and T values of the program being drawn and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate
system are displayed.
(h) Graphic display axis
Parameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, and
Z. The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of the
axes on the CRT screen.
Y Z X Z
XY YZ ZX XYZ
X Y Z
X Y Y
X Y Z
YX ZY XZ XZY
Y Z X
Z X
Y
XYZ2
X
Z
X
346
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Z
X
Y
X
Y 30
180
X Y
X Y
347
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Parameter No. 4832 rotates the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameter is set
to 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen.
Y Y
65_
Initial vertical
X rotation axis
10_
20_ 20_
Z X
Z X
348
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
0001
00010
0002
00020
0001 ; 0002 ;
N10
M98 P2 ; N20
M02 ; M99
In this example, only the portions indicated by the solid lines are drawn.
NOTE The 0xxxx and Nxxxx blocks corresponding to program numbers and sequence numbers
specified in these parameters must be single blocks or blocks containing an NC statement.
Blocks containing an instruction for calling a macro program or subprogram and blocks
containing a macro program are ignored.
Example
Specifiable Not specifiable
01234; 01234 M1 ; Macro call by an M code
N234 ; N234 M98 P4500 ; Subprogram call
N235 G92 X0 Y0; N345 #10 = #20 ; Macro program
349
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
GRAPHIC (PARAMETER)
(1) Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.
(2) Press the [GRAPHIC] soft key or [OTHERS] hard key repeatedly until the graphic screen appears.
(3) Press the [GRAPH PARAM] key to display the graphic parameter screen.
(4) Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> .
(5) Enter the desired values, then press the <INPUT> or <+INPUT> key.
(6) After setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> or <GRAPHIC> key to return to the graphic screen.
350
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
GRAPHIC (GRAPH)
Y
X 400,000
Y 100,000
Z 200,000
100,000
F 0
S 0
T 0
0,000
100,000
X
100,000 0,000 100,000
The soft keys on the GRAPHIC (GRAPH) screen have the functions indicated below.
351
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
The center path of a tool specified in a part program can be drawn according to the procedure below.
(1) To start a new drawing, set the necessary parameters according to Chapter 11.12.2.
(2) Select the GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen, then set the necessary data.
(3) When the part program to be drawn is not stored in memory, load it into memory. M02 or M30 must be
specified at the end of the part program.
(4) Press the [REWIND] soft key to call the part program to be drawn.
(5) Press the [START MACHIN] soft key to start drawing. If STOPPED is not displayed in the lowerright cor-
ner of the screen, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. When drawing is in progress, DRWING
is displayed in the lowerright corner of the CRT screen. If the screen is switched, drawing stops. To re-
sume drawing, return to the graphic screen, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key.
(6) To stop drawing temporarily, specify M00 in the middle of the part program beforehand, or press the STOP
soft key. STOPPED is then displayed in the lowerright corner of the CRT screen. To resume drawing,
press the [START MACHIN] soft key. To resume drawing from the beginning of the program, press the
[REWIND] soft key, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key.
(7) When the last part (M02 or M30) of the part program is executed, drawing stops, and DRWING is no longer
displayed. The drawn tool path is retained until the [ERASE] key is pressed, the graphic is used by another
function, another tool path is drawn, or the power is turned off.
352
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
353
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
NOTE Up to two data items and up to four signals can be sampled simultaneously.
NOTE Up to four data items can be sampled simultaneously. The maximum number of data items
sampled cannot be specified on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. See the later
description of parameters.
11.13.1 Screens
Three display screens are provided for the waveform diagnosis function. This section describes how to display
each screen.
(1) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen
1
Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then press
the operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in (1) are displayed.
Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is dis-
played. On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in (2) are displayed.
354
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
WAVE
1.X
2.Y
00
(2) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen and WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen
2
While these soft keys are displayed, press the [PARAMETER] or [SHIFT] key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS
(PARAMETER) screen or WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is displayed. In this case, the operation
selection soft keys in 3 or 4 are displayed.
3
Pressing the [SET END] key redisplays the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
(WAVE 1) (WAVE 2)
DATA KIND = 0 DATA KIND = 1
DATA RANGE = 1 DATA RANGE = 2
DATA COLOR = 1000 DATA COLOR = 1000
WAVE COLOR = 1 WAVE COLOR = 2
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK
355
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
WAVE
1.X
2.Y
00
X001.1
X001.2
X001.3
X001.4
0 500 1000 1500 TIME(MS)
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK
(2) TRIGGER
Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to a trigger signal in the TRIGGER field on the
WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
Valid data range : G000.0 to G511.7, F000.0 to F319.7,
Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7
(3) TIME RANGE
Enter 25, 50, 100, 200, 400, or 800 in the TIME RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-
TER) screen. The sampling time is specified as 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, or 16.0 s.
The sampling time determines not only sampling conditions, but also graph display conditions.
(4) DATA KIND
Select the type of waveform to be traced and enter your choice in the DATA TYPE field on the WAVE
DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
0 : Servo error (pulses, detection units)
1 : Number of servo pulses to be generated (pulses, command units)
2 : Servo torque (%)
5 : Actual speed (pulses, detection units)
6 : Value of the electric current command for the servo (%)
7 : Data during heat simulation (%)
9 : Composite speed for all axes (mm/min or rpm)
10 : Spindle speed (rpm)
11 : Load meter for a spindle (%)
356
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
NOTE The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented as
percentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979. Spindle speed refers to the
speed of a digital spindle only.
+
Pulse distribution Acceleration/
CMR Error counter
(interpolation) deceleration
circuit
DMR
357
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
2 TRIGGER
Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to the trigger signal specified in the TRIGGER
field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
Valid data range : G000.0 to G511.7, F000.0 to F319.7,
Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7
3 DELAY TIME
Enter the time (0 to 32000 ms) in the DELAY TIME field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen. This setting specifies how long actual termination of tracing is delayed since the tracing ter-
mination condition is satisfied.
4 DATA KIND
Select the types of waveforms to be traced from the following and enter the settings in parameters
4640, 4641, 4645, and 4646 on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
For details, see the later description of parameters.
0 : Servo error (pulses, detection units)
1 : Number of servo pulses to be generated (pulse, command units)
2 : Servo torque (%)
5 : Actual speed (pulses, detection units)
6 : Value of the electric current command for the servo (%)
7 : Data during heat simulation (%)
NOTE The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented as
percentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979.
5 AXIS ASSIGN
Enter one of the following settings in the AXIS ASSIGN field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen.
1 to (the number of controlled axes): Servo axis number
6 DATA RANGE
Enter the value per graduation on the vertical axis of the graph (0 to 524287) in the DATA RANGE field
on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
7 ZERO SHIFT
Enter the value for the zero point (10000 to +10000) in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNO-
SIS (PARAMETER) screen.
8 WAVE COLOR
Enter one of the following settings in the WAVE COLOR field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-
TER) screen.
1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White
358
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
359
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
When the waveform diagnosis data has been input and the waveform diagnosis graph screen is displayed,
graphs are displayed automatically according to the graph display parameter for waveform diagnosis used
when waveform diagnosis data was output.
Graphs are also displayed when the waveform diagnosis graph screen chapter is selected on a screen
other than the graph screen.
Waveform diagnosis data cannot be input under the following conditions:
During automatic operation
While servoalarm waveform diagnosis data is being sampled
While an input/output device controlled in the foreground is being used
(4) Input/output format of waveform diagnosis data
This item shows the input/output format of waveform diagnosis data for reference.
When data output from the CNC controller is used as input, there is no need to care about the input/output
format.
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
C: Characterdata word
2 T60: Date and time of the start or end of tracing
T 6 9 D * * * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
T 6 0 A 1 ; T 6 2 A 1 ; To a.
a. T 6 0 A 3 ; T 6 4 A 3 ;
Pairs of identifier and axisnumber words specify the order to input waveform data blocks in 4.
The above example shows that waveform data blocks are input in the following order: Positional devi-
ation waveform data for the 1st axis, actual electric current waveform data for the 1st axis, positional
deviation waveform data for the 3rd axis, electric current command waveform data for the 3rd axis
4 Waveform data block
D * * * , * * * , * * * , * * * ;
D: Indicates the beginning of a waveform data block. Each data item is separated by a comma
(,). Each block has data for every 8 ms. These blocks continue to be generated for 16 seconds.
360
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then press
the operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in 1 are displayed.
Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is dis-
played.
On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in 2 are displayed.
TRACE ERASE STOP READ PUNCH PARAME SHIFT CHAPTE
2 +
TER R
Go to 3. Go to 3.
When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed, operation guidance key is displayed.
When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed after a file name or file number is input using the keyin
buffer, processing starts immediately.
(FILE_ (FILE
3 EXEC
NAME) #)
Go to 5 if READ . Go to 4. Go to 4.
has been pressed
Go to 6 if PUNCH
has been pressed.
4 EXEC
Go to 5 if READ has been pressed. If the (FILE_NAME) or (FILE#) soft key
Go to 6 if PUNCH has been pressed. has been pressed, enter a file name or file
number with the MDI keys, then press the
EXEC key.
5 STOP
Stops reading and displays soft keys in 2.
FEED
6 STOP
CANCEL
Stops feeding paper tape, if it is being fed, and starts punching.
Stops punching and displays soft keys in 2.
NOTE 1 When the start condition and axis number are specified again to edit the displayed waveforms
after waveform data is sampled, the original waveforms are not displayed again.
NOTE 2 The singleshot type and servoalarm waveform diagnosis functions have different setting
fields on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. For instance, the DI/DO field is
provided only for the singleshot waveform diagnosis function, and the DELAY TIME field is
provided only for the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function.
For the singleshot waveform diagnosis function, the smaller the setting of the TIME RANGE
field, the shorter the sampling time. This allows a large numbers of short cycles to be specified
for sampling. For the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function, each sampling cycle is
always 8 ms regardless of the setting of the TIME RANGE field.
361
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.14.1 Operation
(1) Displaying and erasing the help window
To use the help function, press the [HELP] key (<SHIFT>+<EOB>) on the MDI panel. On a 9inch CRT
screen, the help window is displayed at the center. On a 14inch CRT screen, the help window is displayed
in the topright corner. To erase the help window from a CRT screen, press the [HELP] key again or select
9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW from the initial help menu. The previous screen is redisplayed.
1.ALARM
2.SOFT KEY
HELP ROM
SER.:AH00
EDT.:01
(SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)
362
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
1.ALARM 1.ALARM
ALARM SELECTION ALARM NO. :PS010
DIVISION :GENERAL
PS :FOREGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM. AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED IN
BG :BACKGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM. A NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSO
SR :SERIOUS PROGRAM/SETTING ALARM OCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION,
OH :OVER HEAT ALARM NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION,
SB :SUB CPU ALARM EVEN IF A G CODE IS PROPER.
SW :PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON ALM.
OT :OVERTRAVEL ALARM
PC :PMC ALARM
SV :SERVO ALARM
IO :I/O ALARM
PW :POWER OFF PARAMETER SET ALARM
(SELECT BY CURSOR & INPUT NUMBER) (PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)
Fig. 11.14.1(b) Sample Alarm Selection Display Fig. 11.14.1(c) Sample Detailed Alarm Display
(14Inch CRT) (14Inch CRT)
NOTE Arrows ( on the 14inch CRT screen) or minus and plus signs ( on the 9inch CRT
+
screen) at the topright corner of the window indicate that the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN]
keys can be used.
363
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Fig. 11.14.1(d) Sample Soft Key Selection Display Fig. 11.14.1(e) Sample Detailed Soft Key Display
(14Inch CRT) (14Inch CRT)
NOTE An arrow ( on the 14inch CRT screen) or a plus sign ( + on the 9inch CRT screen)
at the bottomright corner of the window indicates that the message continues beyond the
window.
364
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
1.ALARM 1.ALARM
ALARM NO.:PS010 01/02 CURRENT ALARM LIST
DIVISION :GENERAL
AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED IN PS010 OT008
A NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSO
OCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION,
NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION,
EVEN IF A CODE IS PROPER.
(PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT) (SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)
Fig. 11.14.1(f) Sample Detailed Alarm Display Fig. 11.14.1(g) Sample Alarm List Display
(14Inch CRT) in the Alarm State (14Inch CRT) in the Alarm State
(8) Enabling or disabling the cursor (only for a 14inch CRT)
The frame of a help window is first displayed in green. In this state, the cursor can be moved only within
the help window. The cursor displayed on the original screen is erased.
If the [SHIFT] key is then pressed twice, the cursor is erased from the window and restored on the original
screen. In this state, the frame of the window is displayed in white. By pressing the [SHIFT] key twice, the
cursor can be moved to the help window or to the original screen. When the cursor is in the right half of
the original screen, the help window is shifted to the left. The operator can edit the program and specify
parameters while the help window is open.
365
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Initial help
menu
The dotted box indicates the area in which the help window is displayed. When the <HELP> key is
pressed in this state, the help window is closed and the initial state is restored.
The help window is not displayed on the PMC, MMC, or conversational macro screen. If the screen is
switched to one of these three screens while the help window is displayed, the help window is erased.
366
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
HISTRY CHAPTER
ERASE CHAPTER +
367
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
368
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
NOTE The number of display lines varies according to the history data type. For details, see item(4).
(c) The following soft keys are used as operation selection keys.
(i) TOP
Displays the first page of history data, which starts with oldest history data item.
(ii) LAST
Displays the last page of history data, which ends with the newest history data item.
(iii) SEARCH
Searches for a particular type of history data item. For details, see item(5).
(iv) PUNCH
Outputs history data. For details, see item(6).
(v) ERASE
Erases history data. For details, see item(7).
(d) Press the [SEARCH] soft key (one of the above operation selection keys). Any of the following data
items can be searched for. For details, see item(5).
(i) DIDO
Searches for signal history data.
(ii) ALARM
Searches for alarm history data.
(iii) TIME
Searches for time history data.
(iv) FW_SRCH
Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data is
searched for forward from the currently displayed history data (toward newer history data).
(v) BW_SRCH
Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data is
searched for backward from the currently displayed history data (toward older history data).
(e) Press the [PUNCH] soft key selected (one of the operation selection keys). The following operation
instruction keys are displayed. For details, see item(6).
(i) ALL
Outputs all history data items.
(ii) PART
Outputs some history data items.
369
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(iii) EXEC
Starts punchout.
(f) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys). The following operation instruction
keys are displayed. For details, see item(7).
(i) EXEC
Executes erasing.
(ii) CANCEL
Cancels erasing.
(3) OPERATION HISTORY screen
The smaller the number of a history data item, the older it is.
9inch CRT
370
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Alarm number
Alarm type
Alarm data items are displayed over three lines. The number and type of the alarm are displayed on the
first line, and the date and time when the alarm occurred are displayed on the next two lines.
(d) Time and date
The following times and dates are collected and displayed as history data.
i) Time and date when the power was turned on
92/08/30
11:30:32
ii) Time and date when the power was turned off
92/08/30
11:55:16
iii) Time and date when an NC alarm occurred
92/08/30
11:33:48
iv) Time and date when the time and/or date was changed
92/08/31
00:00:00
5 Time and date at constant intervals
92/08/30
11:45:32
Specify this interval in parameter 7765.
NOTE Even when the above parameter is set, the time and date are not collected if no other history
data (keys, signals, etc.) is collected within the specified interval.
371
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Example G
When the entered signal type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data item
is found.
(ii) Alarm data item
(a) Press the [ALARM] key.
(b) Use one of the following search methods:
1 Enter an alarm type and alarm number with keys.
Example OT7
When the entered alarm type and alarm number agree with those of a history data item, that
history data item is found.
2 Enter an alarm type with keys.
Example OT
When the entered alarm type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data item is
found.
(iii) Time data
(a) Press the [TIME] key.
(b) Use the following search method.
Enter month/date/hour/minute with keys. Less significant data can be omitted as shown in the
example below.
Example Month/date/hour/minute: 08/26/13/24
Month/date/hour: 08/26/13
Month/date: 08/26
Month: 08
NOTE Enter the month, date, hour, and minute with two digits each.
NOTE Searching forward for a history data item terminates at the most recent history data item (last
data item). Searching backward for a history data item terminates at the oldest history data
item (first data item). If the specified history data item is not found, a warning is issued.
When the specified history data item is found during searching, the page of history data items that con-
tains the specified history data item is displayed. The line number of the specified history data item
is displayed in reverse video. Subsequently, this history data item is used as the (search pointer) dur-
ing searching. When searching has not yet been performed, the oldest history data item (first data)
is used as the search pointer. The search pointer is also used during partial punchingout.
Once history data has been searched for, the search pointer is kept until the power is turned off. When
the memory for history data items becomes full, the first data in the history is automatically used as
the search pointer.
(6) Outputting history data
History data can be output to the host computer via the RS232C interface.
(a) Press the [PUNCH] soft key (one of the operation selection keys) on the OPERATION HISTORY
screen.
(b) The following punchingout can be performed:
(i) Complete punchout
Press the [ALL] soft key, then press the [EXEC] soft key. All history data items are output.
(ii) Partial punchout
372
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
1 Before starting partial punchout, use the search function to determine the reference points for
starting and ending partial punchout. The search pointer is used as (reference history data item)
for partial punchout.
For details on searching, see item(5).
2 Specify the number of display lines of history data items to output.
For details on display lines, see item(4).
Example 1 To output 100 history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the
[PART] soft key, enter 100, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
Example 2 To output 100 history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the
[PART] soft key, enter 100, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
Example 3 To output all history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the [PART]
soft key, enter 9999, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
Example 4 To output all history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the
[PART] soft key, enter 9999, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
(c) History data items are output in ASCII code in the following format.
(i) MDI key
Example When the [A] key is pressed
[MDI] key pushed A LF
(ii) DI/DO
Example 1 When the state of G003.5 changes from off to on
DI/DO changed G3.5_ON LF
Example 2 When different signals with the same address are changed at the same time
DI/DO changed F0.6_ONF0.1_OFF LF
(iii) Alarm
Example When the alarm, PW000 TURN OFF THE POWER occurs
Alarm! PW0 at 92/8/30 23:17:56 LF
(iv) Time
Example 1 At 23:17:56 on August 30, 1992
92/8/30 23:17:56 LF
Example 2 When the power is turned on
92/8/30 23:17:56 Power On LF
(d) Communication protocol
Refer to the case where the NC sends data in Transmission Method for the RS232C Interface in
the FANUC Series 15B Operators Manual (Appendixies).
(7) Erasing history data
(a) Press the [OPE_HIS] soft key (one of the chapter selection keys).
(b) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys).
(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key (one of the operation instruction keys).
When the [EXEC] soft key is pressed by mistake during selection, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
When operation history data is erased, the date and time it was erased is recorded at the beginning
of new history data.
373
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
HISTRY CHAPTER
INPUT CHAPTER +
EXEC CANCEL
374
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
NOTE Changes in signals cannot be deleted unless they continue for longer than 16ms.
375
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
HISTRY CHAPTER
376
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Message text
Axis for which the alarm occurred
Alarm number
Alarm type
On the 14inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence and alarm history data are displayed in
this order on a line. On the 9inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence is displayed over two
lines under the alarm history data.
11.15.4 Restrictions
(1) The operation history function does not collect history data items while the OPERATION HISTORY screen
is being displayed.
(2) While the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed, the operation history function does not collect
history data items even when the OPERATION HISTORY screen is changed to the PMC screen. This is
because it is still assumed that the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed.
(3) Approx. 2040 <MDI> key history data items can be recorded in memory as history data. When memory
is full, older data items are deleted first.
(4) Specify the correct date and time on the setting screen.
(5) The number of signal addresses specified on the SELECT DI/DO screen affects the processing speed dur-
ing automatic operation. Specify only the required signal addresses.
377
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
378
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
379
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
ANGLE OF ROTATION
(G/D/H) (M) (T) [ROTATION CENTER]
G91 G54 M02
90.00000 G01
G17
G80
G64
Displays the absolute position
G40
D 0
G49
H 0
(L): 0
of the center of coordinate
(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0 rotation.
(S) (ACT.S) 0
[ANGLE OF ROTATION]
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK
380
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
381
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
[Scaling screen]
382
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
Po
Position before manual
intervention
S
Amount of manual
Offset of the origin of the WZo Origin of the workpiece intervention
workpiece coordinate coordinate system before manual
system for G54 intervention
Workpiece coordinate sys-
tem (G54) after manual in-
tervention
S
Pn
Position after manual in-
Machine zero point tervention
Fig. 11.17 Coordinate System before and after Manual Intervention when the Manual Absolute
Signal is Off
NOTE The shift is the distance the coordinate system moves along each axis (in the case of (i) for
example). Vector S in Fig. 11.17 in dicates the total shift along the axes.
Explanation
The workpiece coordinate system used for automatic operation is defined with several offsets.
The controlled axes, the machine coordinates, absolute coordinates, and offsets are related as fol lows:
[Machine coordinate]=[Absolute coordinate] + External workpiece zero point offset
+ Currently valid offset among those caused by G54 to G59
+ Offset caused by G92 (1)
+ Offset caused by G52 (2)
+ Other data related to coordinates (3)
This function can display values (1), (2), and (3) above on the diagnosis screen.
383
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
The table below lists the diagnosis number of each data item related to the coordinates for each control axis.
Diagnosis No. Description
4100 Shift in the coordinate system by manual operation
4101 Shift in the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic /
manual simultaneous function or other function
4102 Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with a
G92 command
4103 Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52
command
4104 Shift of the coordinate system in the machine lock state
(2) Shift of the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic/manual simultaneous
function or other function.
Displays the amount of intervention caused by a manual interrupt along each axis.
Diagnosis No. Indication Description
4101 MANUAL SHIFT Displays the manual interrupt amount along the X-axis caused by
the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.
Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Y-axis caused by
the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.
Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Z-axis caused by
the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.
(3) Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with a G92 command.
Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G92 command.
Diagnosis No. Indication Description
4102 G92 OFFSET Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the X-axis in
input increments.
Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Y-axis in
input increments.
Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Z-axis in
input increments.
384
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(4) Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52 command.
Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G52 command.
Diagnosis No. Indication Description
4103 G92 OFFSET Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the X-axis in
input increments.
Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Y-axis in
input increments.
Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Z-axis in
input increments.
385
12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION B62564E1/02
This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function.
Saver screen
j j j j j
386
B62564E1/02 12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION
Notes
(1) When operator input causes the original screen to be redisplayed, the input is also reflected on the
screen.
(2) For screens other than the CNC screen, such as the PMC, conversational, or TC screen, the screen
saver function is disabled.
(3) When a newly issued alarm is of the same type (PS, OT, or SV) as that of an alarm which was issued
previously, the original screen is not redisplayed.
Example While OT100 is being issued, if OT001 is issued, the original screen is not redisplayed. When
SV001 is issued, the original screen is redisplayed.
(4) Even while an alarm is being displayed on the screen, if the operator does not operate the keyboard
for a predetermined period, the screen saver is automatically activated, and the saver screen is dis-
played.
(5) While a graphic screen is being created (for example, with the graphic display function), the screen
saver may not be activated.
(6) This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function.
(7) This function is also enabled while the screen is displayed using a conversational macro.
(8) When the screen clear function is used, it takes priority over this function. (The saver screen is als
cleared.)
Parameter Description
Setting entry
Data type : Byte
Data unit : Minute
Data range : 0 to 127
When the operator does not operate the keyboard for the period specified in this parameter, the saver screen
is displayed. When 0 is specified, the screen saver function is disabled.
387
13. DATA OUTPUT B62564E1/02
13.DATA OUTPUT
388
B62564E1/02 13. DATA OUTPUT
13.2 Parameters
The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as
the parameter tape format.
1 Setting the data output interface
Set what interface is used as the data 9" CRT function selection keys
output interface in the foreground
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +
output device. (See Section 10.3.)
The reader/punch interface or
ASR33 interface can output data.
2 Setting the output code 9" CRT operation selection keys
Set whether to output data in the EIA PUNCH READ
or ISO code in the punch code. (See
Section 10.3.)
3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT
mode. 9" CRT operation guide keys
4 Press the function menu key to en- A L L PARAM PITCH (F_NAM) (FILEt)
able the soft keys to function as the
function selection keys.
5 Press the SERVICE key (soft or hard
key) several times.
Display the screen of the parameter
14" CRT function selection keys
6 Press the operation menu key to en-
POSITI PROGRA OFFSET SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
able the soft keys to function as the ON M
PROGRAM
CHECK G E E R
operation selection keys.
7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the
soft keys to function as the operation
guide keys. 14" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT
8 INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 NUM READ PUNC
PUT BER H
To output parameters other
than the pitch error com-
pensation 14" CRT operation guidance keys
PARA PITCH (FILE_ (FILE
Press the PARM key. ALL ME ER NAME) #)
TER ROR
To output only the pitch error
compensation
Press the PITCH key.
To output all the parameters at
a time
Press the ALL key.
9 Parameter output is started and the
STOP soft key is displayed.
10 To cancel parameter output, press
the STOP key. Once this key is
pressed, however, output of the re-
maining parameters cannot be re-
started.
11 After the parameters have been out-
put, the soft keys return to operating
as the operation selection keys.
389
13. DATA OUTPUT B62564E1/02
NOTE The offset from the workpiece reference point can be output only when the addition of
workpiece coordinate set count (option) is available.
390
B62564E1/02 13. DATA OUTPUT
391
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
Cassette 2 or Card 2
Continuation
of file k File (k+1) File n Blank
Once written in the cassette or card, data can subsequently be read out by correspondence between the data
contents and file numbers. This correspondence cannot be verified, unless the data contents and file numbers
are output to the CNC and displayed.
Therefore, when writing data in the cassette or card, enter the file numbers and data contents in the memo col-
umn.
Entry example on MEMO
File 1 NC parameters
File 2 Offset data
File 3 NC programO0100
. .
. .
File (n1) NC programO0500
File n NC program O0600
392
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
B62564E1/02 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
1 to 9999 The file with the specified file number ( 1 to 9999 ) is searched out.
NOTE 1 Note that when file number N0 or N1 is specified, the results of file searchout depend on
whether the cassette or card contains any files.
File searchout
When the cassette contains or the When the cassette or the card dose
card a files not contain any files
When writing data in a new cassette or card for the first time, specify N0 to search out the cassette or the
card. Also specify N0 when writing data from the beginning of the cassette or the card after deleting all
the written data.
NOTE 2 Even if file searchout is not performed correctly (the file is not found, etc.), no alarm occurs
in the CNC. Whether P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs depends on what I/O channel is
being used when data input/output is performed after file searchout.
393
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
Examples of data input/output performed after file searchout are given below. For details of data input/
output, see Sections 14.3 and 14.4.
Example 1 When program number 1234 in NC memory is output as file 5 in the cassette or the card
1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode.
2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen.
3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].
4 Press the soft key PUNCH.
5 Enter [(FILE#)], [5], [(PROG#)], [1], [2], [3], and [4] in that order.
6 Press the soft key [EXEC].
When the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the file corresponding to number 5 is searched out and a program
with program number 1234 is output to the file as a new file. File number 5 follows N and program number
1234 follows 0.
Example 2 When file 3 in the cassette is loaded into CNC memory
1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode.
2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen.
3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ].
4 Press the soft key [READ].
5 Enter [(FILE#)] and [3] in this order.
6 Press the soft key [ALL].
When the soft key [ALL] is pressed, the file corresponding to the file number following N is searched out
and the CNC program in that file is loaded into CNC memory.
394
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
B62564E1/02 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
A
File1 File2 File3 (File4 ) Blank (Afteroutput)
A
File1 (File2 ) Blank (Afteroutput)
395
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
CAUTION The cassette and card are provided with the write protect switch. Set the switch to the write
enable state. Then, start output operation.
NOTE 1 If P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output to the cassette
or the card, the contents of the cassette or the card are restored to the preoutput status. If
P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output after file
searchout has been performed, however, only the files before the searched out file are
restored.
NOTE 2 When program output is conducted after N1 to N9999 head searching, the new file is output
as the designated nth position. In this case, 1 to n1 files are effective, but the files after the
old nth one are deleted. If an alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n1 files are restored.
NOTE 3 Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from the CNC to the cassette
or card is again input to the CNC memory or compared with the content of the CNC memory.
Therefore, immediately after a file is output from the CNC to the cassette or card, record the
file No. on the memo.
396
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
B62564E1/02 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
397
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
398
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
B62564E1/02 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
CAUTION If steps 5 to 7 are executed without the writeprotect key in the RECORD position in step
4, no alarm occurs. Also note that the specified file is not deleted.
Example 1 When [(FILE#)] [2] is entered and [EXEC] is pressed (when file 2 is deleted)
399
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
14.6 Precautions
NOTE 1 Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptor, no special operation is required. The
CNC will interrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserted into the adaptor.
NOTE 2 When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request for cassette replacement, the
CNC is not reset at once, but reset after the cassette has been replaced.
CAUTION All alarms occurred in the adapter are displayed as P/S alarm No.86. Find out the cause of
the error using the statuses of the cassette or card and looking back each operation, then
release the alarm.
400
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
B62564E1/02 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
401
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
14.8.1 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name
Searching for a file by specifying its file name
A file that has been stored to a cassette can be searched for by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:
Example Searching for file ABC
1. Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen.
2. Press the [SRH_FIL] operation selection key.
3. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.
(SRH _FIL > is displayed in the keyin field.)
4. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.
(SRH _FIL > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.)
5. Press [EXEC].
402
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
B62564E1/02 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
Volume transfer
A file stored on the currently selected drive can be transferred to the other drive by specifying the file number
or file name. This operation is called volume transfer. In volume transfer, all files or a single file can be trans-
ferred. Use the following procedure:
1. Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen.
2. Select EDIT mode.
3. Press the [VOLCOPY] operation selection key.
4. Press [ALL] (to transfer all files).
(VOLCPOY > ALL is displayed in the keyin field.)
Alternatively, enter [(FILE#)], then (file number) (to transfer one file by specifying its file number).
(VOLCPOY > Nxxxx is displayed in the keyin field.)
xxxx: Selected file number
Alternatively, enter [(F_NAM)], then (file name) (to transfer one file by specifying its file name).
(VOLCPOY > filename is displayed in the keyin field.)
5. Press [EXEC].
403
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
14.8.4 Notes
NOTE 1 Parameters can be input and output, using the parameter screen, as normal. Note, however,
that the output file name is PARAMETER.
NOTE 2 Offset data can be input and output, using the offset screen, as normal. Note, however, that
the output file name is OFFSET.
NOTE 3 Up to 17 alphanumeric characters can be entered as a file name. If more than 17 characters
are entered, only the first 17 are used as the file name. The first character of the file name must
not be a space.
NOTE 4 Drive selection, renaming of a file, volume transfer, and deletion of all files can be performed
only when the 2drive Floppy Cassette adapter is being used. If these operations are
attempted while using the onedrive Floppy Cassette adapter, the ILLEGAL INTERFACE
warning message appears.
NOTE 5 If a file name, specified for search, input, or deletion, is not found on the cassette, alarm DR
OFF is issued.
NOTE 6 If the name specified for an output file duplicates one that already exists, alarm DR OFF is
issued.
404
B62564E1/02 15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION
15.ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION
On an axis equipped with an absolute pulse coder, the machine position is monitored even when the CNC pow-
er is turned off, so return to the reference position is unnecessary when the power is turned on again.
An absolute pulse coder consists of an ordinary incremental pulse coder equipped with an absolute counter.
Based on the counter value, an absolute position can be detected.
The absolute pulse coder uses the backup battery so that the pulse coder monitors the machine position by
the counter if the CNC is turned off.
If an absolute pulse coder is installed on an axis, the current position on that axis is read from the absolute
counter when the CNC is turned on, and the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system are
automatically set based on the read value. Automatic operation can thus start immediately.
The requirements for reference position return after poweron operation, described in this manual, do not apply
to axes equipped with an absolute pulse coder.
CAUTION If a servo motor is to be detached from a control axis, the absolute pulse coder cannot be
used for that axis.
NOTE The time from the poweron operation until the servo ready signal (SA) is output varies
depending on the distance between the machine position detected at poweron and the
reference position. If the distance is 1 m, the time required until the servo ready signal (SA)
is output is extended by approximately 1 s.
405
15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION B62564E1/02
15.3 Alarm
When the power is turned on, one of the following alarms may occur:
(1) Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS SCDR)
The reference position is not associated with the counter value of the absolute pulse coder. That is,
parameter APLCZRN is 0.
Before the CNC power is turned on, the battery voltage for the absolute pulse coder dropped to 0 V,
and the counter value of the absolute pulse coder is lost.
An error was detected in the counter value of the absolute pulse coder.
If alarm OT32 occurs, it is necessary to manually return the tool to the reference position. See Section
15.2.
(2) Alarm SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR)
An error occurred while data was being read from the absolute pulse coder. (The absolute pulse coder
may be faulty.)
If the machine moves a considerable amount when the power is turned on, the motor excess deviation
alarm occurs.
If this alarm occurs, turn the power off then on again.
(3) Battery voltage alarm
The battery voltage alarm, BAT, is indicated on the CRT screen.
For how to replace the battery, see Part IV, Maintenance.
CAUTION If BAT is indicated on the CRT screen, display the signal output status on the service screen
to check whether the alarm applies to the system or the absolute pulse coder.
2 Press the [SERVICE] soft key or the SERVICE hard key. The service screen appears.
3 If the service screen being displayed does not show diagnostic data, perform the following:
Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
406
B62564E1/02 15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION
(i) Press the operation menu key to display the operation selection keys.
INP-NO. +
(ii) Press the [INPNO.] key. Then, the operation guidance keys are displayed.
(VALUE)
EXEC
Display diagnostic data No. 240 using the above procedure. If the 7th bit (leftmost data) is 1, the battery
voltage alarm applies to the system. If the 6th bit of diagnostic data No. 240 is 1, the battery voltage alarm
applies to the absolute pulse coder.
CAUTION The voltage level of the backup battery for the absolute pulse coder is normally 6 V. Over
time, however, the voltage level drops.
V
6V
4.5V
DO.PBATL
1.5V
DO.PBATZ
407
15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION B62564E1/02
15.4 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI
Operation
When the absolute pulse coder or servo motor is replaced, the zero point of the absolute pulse coder must be
set by storing the counter value of the absolute pulse coder with the machine set at the reference position.
There are two methods to set the zero point of the absolute pulse coder. One method uses manual reference
position return. The other method uses MDI operation for setting the zero point, which is done after the machine
is moved to the reference position manually.
When the zero point of the absolute pulse coder is set through MDI operation, the dog which is used for decel-
eration in manual reference position return and the switches for selecting the manual reference position return
mode are unnecessary. The MDI operation for setting the zero point of the absolute pulse coder, however, re-
quires some means to confirm that the machine is at the reference position.
When the machine has been moved to the reference position by manual jog feed, manual handle feed, or
another operation, the zero point can be set by setting parameters through MDI.
Use the following procedure:
1 Set APLCZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 0.
Alarm message POWERMUST BE OFF appears.
2 Turn off the power, then turn it on again.
Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) appears.
3 Move the machine to the reference position through manual jog feed, manual handle feed, manual incre-
mental feed, or suchlike.
4 Set APLCZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 1.
Alarm message POWERMUST BE OFF appears.
5 Turn off the power, then turn it on again.
The zero point is then set.
408
B62564E1/02 16. AXIS CONTROL
16.AXIS CONTROL
PMC CNC
BMI
First axis Pulse Servo
management control Motor
distribution
First axis,
PMC axis
control data
Second axis Pulse Servo
management distribution control Motor
Second axis,
Command PMC axis
control data
Third axis Pulse Servo
management distribution Motor
control
Third axis,
PMC axis
control data
:
:
Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
409
16. AXIS CONTROL B62564E1/02
CAUTION The machine coordinate and absolute coordinate are updated in different directions along
the specified axis. The workpiece coordinate system shifts as the machine moves. When
the mirror image function is enabled for the Xaxis, the coordinate system shifts as shown
below.
Machine movement
after mirror image Move command
(Automatic operation)
Absolute coordi
nate when mirror
image is started Absolute coordinate
after mirror image on
Work coordinate
system shiftvalue
Machine X
origin
After a desired machining has been finished, move the machine to the position where the
mirror image function was applied and disable the function. This cancels the shift of the
workpiece coordinate system to zero.
Alternatively, perform one of the following to set the shift of the workpiece coordinate system
to zero.
Manual reference position return
Presetting the workpiece coordinate system (by using the G92.1 command or by
specifying the preset operation on the MDI)
NOTE 1 The mirror image cannot be switched during axis movement. Always switch the mirror image
during stopped state.
NOTE 2 For mirror image during manual operation, either on or off of mirror image that was valid by
setting operation or by external mirror image signal when the mode was switched to the manual
operation is effective. Switching of mirror image state either by setting operation or by external
mirror image signal is not effective in the manual operation.
410
II. MAINTENANCE
B62564E1/02 1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
(3)
(5)
A8600060V009
(2)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(1) (8)
(7) (11)
Fig. 1.1 (a) Front view of the tape reader without reels (with the cover removed)
(9)
Fig. 1.1 (b) Side view of the tape reader without reels
413
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE B62564E1/02
(6)
(6)
(6)
(7) (8)
Fig. 1.1 (c) Front view of the tape reader with reels (with the cover removed)
(9)
Fig. 1.1 (d) Side view of the tape reader with reels
414
B62564E1/02 1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1 Magnet section See Fig.1.1 (a) (7) . Every 3 Luna oil 1 drop
months
415
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE B62564E1/02
2 Guide roller section See Fig.1.2 (e) . Every 6 Rocol oil 2 to 3 drops
months
3 Tension arm guide roller See Fig.1.2 (f) . Every 6 Rocol oil 2 to 3 drops
months
416
B62564E1/02 1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
(3) (3)
2
(2)
(1)
Fig. 1.2 (e) Front view of the tape reader with reels
*1 Types of lubricants
417
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE B62564E1/02
*U*U*U*U DELETE
CR
For adjustment, use the adjustment program included in the tape reader with reels.
418
B62564E1/02 1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
3 Adjustment
a) The adjustment points are lo-
cated at the right side, viewed
from the rear of the tape reader
with reels. (If they are not at the
location indicated in the figure,
they are located in section
A(*4).)
b) Turn SP until LD5 lights.
c) Turn DATA until LD1 blinks(*5).
If LD5 does not light, adjustment
is impossible.
4 End of adjustment
a) Press STOP.
b) Set RELEASE.
c) Press FORWARD and STOP at
the same time.
d) The normal mode then returns.
e) Before starting adjustment,
make sure that the signal cables
are connected properly.
419
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE B62564E1/02
Losen the
Printed circuit screws.
board
Screw DATA
*5 If LD0 and LD3 blink when the DATA dial is turned, the following adjustment is needed:
DATA DATA
LD3 LD1
420
B62564E1/02 1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1.4 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabinet Only)
If the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit is clogged by dust, the efficiency of dust collection drops,
and the temperature inside the equipment may rise. Therefore the air filter needs to be cleaned. Clean the
filter every week as follows:
(1) Remove the filter retainer, then remove the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit.
(2) Blow dust away from the internal side of the filter while shaking the filter lightly.
(3) If the filter is still dirty, clean it with neutral cleanser, then dry it in the shade.
421
2. REPLACING A FUSE B62564E1/02
2. REPLACING A FUSE
If a fuse in the CNC system blows, find the cause, take appropriate action, then replace the fuse.
Power unit AI or BI
F1
F2
F3
F4
DI/DO connector
422
B62564E1/02 3. REPLACING BATTERIES
3. REPLACING BATTERIES
3.1 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit
(1) Obtain a lithium battery (A98L00310007).
(2) Turn on the power to the machine (NC). (The battery can be replaced when the NC is either on or off. Note
that if the battery is replaced with the NC turned off, replacing the buttery must be completed within 30 min-
utes. Otherwise the NC memory contents may be lost.
(3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power unit. Hold the upper and lower sides of the case,
and pull it out toward you.
A98L00310007
423
3. REPLACING BATTERIES B62564E1/02
424
B62564E1/02 4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
425
4. TROUBLESHOOTING B62564E1/02
426
B62564E1/02 4. TROUBLESHOOTING
427
4. TROUBLESHOOTING B62564E1/02
428
B62564E1/02 4. TROUBLESHOOTING
INP-NO. +
(ii) Press the [INPNO]. key. Then, the soft keys are switched to the operation guidance keys.
(VALUE)
(iii) Enter the data number of the target diagnostic data. As the data number is entered, the soft keys
are displayed as follows:
EXEC
5 Press the [EXEC] key. Then the diagnostic data with the entered data number is displayed on the screen.
The soft keys are returned to the operation selection keys.
429
4. TROUBLESHOOTING B62564E1/02
No. Bit
1010 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RST ERS RRW ESP
When 1 is indicated
ESP : Emergency stop
RRW : The reset & rewind signal is on.
ERS : The external reset signal is on.
RST : The reset key is pressed.
A bit set to 1 means that the associated error explained above occurred.
(3) TH alarm status indication
The TH alarm status is indicated.
430
B62564E1/02 4. TROUBLESHOOTING
Overload alarm : #7 = 1
Disconnection alarm : #1 = 1
Then check the diagnostic data (No. 3015 (1st axis), No. 3035 (2nd axis), No. 3055 (3rd axis), or the start-
ing diagnostic number for the target axis plus 5). Confirm the meaning of the alarm.
From bits 7 and 4 at each address, the alarm can be determined in detail. See the following table:
7bit 4bit
Alarm type
ALDF EXPC
Overheated motor 1 0
Overheated amplifier 0 0
Disconnection in the internal pulse coder (hardware) 1 0
Disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware) 1 1
Pulse coder disconnection (software) 0 0
Example If the SV 015 disconnection alarm occurs on the first axis, diagnostic data Nos. 3014 and
3015 contain the following:
No. 3014 : 00000010
No. 3015 : 10110100
As shown above, bit 1 (FBAL) of diagnostic data No. 3014 is set to 1.
At the same time, bit 7 (ALDF) and bit 4 (EXPC) of diagnostic data No. 3015 are both set to
1. Thus, the alarm indicates disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware).
431
4. TROUBLESHOOTING B62564E1/02
Symbol Description
OFAL LSI OVERFLOW
An overflow alarm has occurred in the digital servo.
FBAL PULCO DISCONNECTION
A pulse coder disconnection alarm has occurred.
DCAL EXCESS I FORM MOTOR
A regenerative discharge circuit alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier.
(The DC LED on the servo amplifier is on.)
HVAL EXCESS V TO MOTOR
An overvoltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HV LED
on the servo amplifier is on.)
HCAL ABNORMAL CURRENT IN SERVO
An abnormal current alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HC
LED on the servo amplifier is on.)
OVC EXCESS CURRENT IN SERVO
An overcurrent (overload) alarm has occurred in the
servo amplifier.
LV POWER V TOO LOW
An insufficient voltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The LV
LED on the servo amplifier is on.)
OVL SV OVERLOAD
An overload alarm has occurred in the servo motor or servo amplifier. If
the alarm is activated from the servo amplifier, either the servo amplifier,
separate discharge unit, or power transformer has overheated. (The OH
LED on the servo amplifier is on.)
432
B62564E1/02 4. TROUBLESHOOTING
433
5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE B62564E1/02
Failure Diagnosis
In the example at the left, four
diagnosis items are provided.
1 Automatic operation
2 Manual operation
3 ATC
4 APC
Select an item to be diagnosed. To diagnose an automatic operation failure, for example, select item 1.
2
Failure Diagnosis
Then, detailed diagnosis items for automatic operation are displayed. When item 1 is selected, the failure is
diagnosed based on the knowledge base.
434
B62564E1/02 5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE
3 Generally, the states of input/output signals are checked automatically. Only items that require the opera-
tors confirmation appear as shown below:
Failure Diagnosis
4 When the inference about the cause of the failure has been made, the cause and action to be taken are
displayed.
Failure Diagnosis
435
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,
B62564E1/02 WHEN RESET
Offset value f f
ata
Setting dat
Data set by the MDI
f f
setting operation
Se
parameter f f
Programs in memory f f
Contents in the
buffer storage
Display of sequence f
number ( Note 1 )
F, E Zero Zero
S, T, M f
Movement
Dwell
xecution
Issurance of M, S
and T codes
n during exe
Storing called
subprogram number ( Note 2 )
Rewind
439
APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,
WHEN RESET B62564E1/02
( lights in emergency
NOT READY
stop )
REFERENCE POINT
RETURN COMPLE- f
TION LED
EDs
for LE
S and T codes f
nals fo
M code f
utput sign
M, S and T strobe
signals
Out
NC ready signal
ON f
( MA, MB )
NOTE 1 When a program is returned to its head, the start program number is displayed.
NOTE 2 When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to the head
of the main program by the rewind operation. Execution cannot be started from the middle of
the subprogram.
440
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
RS232C RS422
Interface Serial voltage Balanced transmission,
interface serial interface
( Startstop system ) ( Startstop system )
Baud rate 50 to 19200 baud 50 to 86400 baud
Tape punch Possible Possible
Tape reading Possible Possible
Cable length 100m ( When 4800 baud Approx. 800m ( When
( Max. ) or less ) 4800 baud or less )
( depending on I/O
50m ( When 9600 baud equipment )
or less )
( depending on I/O
equipment )
Remarks RS232C is not name RS422 is not name
of I/O equipment. of I/O equipment.
Its EIA standard. Its EIA standard.
Specifying reader/punch interface A, which is a Series 15 option, enables the following two channels to be
used:
(a) Connector JD5A on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS232C
(b) Connector JD5B on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS232C
This interface, however, cannot be used if a tape reader incorporated into an NC cabinet is used.
Specifying reader/punch interface B and serial port A or B also enables the following two channels to be
used:
(c) Connector JD6D on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS422
(d) Connector JD5J on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS232C
For the parameters related to the RS232C and RS422 interfaces, see Appendix 7.4.15.
441
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
POS. 1
2
3 JD5A ( RS-232-C )
4
JD5B ( RS-232-C )
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
442
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
443
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
JD5A
JD5B RS 232 C
JD6D RS 422 JD5J
1 RD 11 SD 1 RD 11 SD
2 *RD 12 *SD 2 0V 12 0V
3 RT 13 TT 3 DR 13 ER
4 *RT 14 *TT 4 0V 14 0V
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS 15 RS
6 *CS 16 *RS 6 0V 16 0V
7 DM 17 TR 7 CD 17
8 0V 18 *TR 8 0V 18
9 *DM 19 ( + 24V ) 9 19 + 24V
10 ( + 24V ) 20 10 + 24V 20
444
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
CNC
Output
Input
SD (Send Data)
RD (Receive Data)
RS (Request to Send)
When not using CS, connect CS and
RS.
CS (Clear to Send)
ER (Equipment Ready)
When not using DR, connect
DR and ER.
DR (Data Set Ready)
Be sure to connect ER and CD.
CD (Carrier Detect)
SG (Signal Ground)
FG (Frame Ground)
445
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
RS232C
Signal name I/O Description
circuit number
3 V or lower +3 V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal condition Marking Spacing
446
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
Start bit Data bit (8 bit including one parity bit) Stop bits (2 bits)
(b) Codes
(i) EIA code + control codes DC1 to DC4
(ii) ISO code + control codes DC1 to DC4
Input/output units must be able to identify the following control codes output from the NC unit:
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC 1 Tape reader start f f f
NOTE The above control codes are always used irrespective of EIA and ISO.
447
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
448
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
CAUTION When the input/output unit is equipped with the ISO/EIA converter, pay special attention to
the following items listed in Table 3.3 (a):
EIA code (. . . . . . . . . . . . . ) CR O . . . . . . . . . . .
ISO code ( . . . . . . . . . . . . .) LF : . . . . . . . . . . .
Condition 1 :To represent left parenthesis ( of the ISO code in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and
5 of the EIA code are punched out. To represent right parenthesis ) of the ISO
code in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and 7 of the EIA code are punched out.
Condition 2: Character O of the EIA code corresponds to colon : of the ISO code.
Condition 3: : code.
CR of the EIA code corresponds to LF of the ISO
NOTE Control codes DC1 to DC4 are the transmission codes output from NC. These codes need not
be punched out on an NC tape.
449
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
Timing chart when the NC receives data (loading data into memory)
(1) The NC unit sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit.
(2) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit starts sending data to the NC.
(3) When the NC cannot keep up with processing, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit.
(4) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission to the NC.
Data transmission stops within 10 characters after control code DC3 has been sent. (If more than ten char-
acters are sent, alarm SR82, SR83, or SR84 occurs.)
(5) The NC sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit after processing has terminated.
(6) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit restarts data transmission to NC. (Data transmission, however,
must be restarted beginning with data immediately following the previously sent data.)
(7) When data read is completed, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit.
(8) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission.
10 ms or longer
100 ms or longer
ER (Output)
RS (Output)
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
SD (Output)
ER code
RD (Input)
DR (Input)
CS (Input)
Up to 10 characters
1 ms or longer
(1) The NC unit sends control code DC2 to the input/output unit.
(2) The NC sends punched out information to the input/output unit.
(3) When the input/output unit cannot keep up with data processing
(a) When the CS signal of the NC is turned off, the NC stops data transmission within two characters, in-
cluding the data currently being sent.
When the CS signal is turned on again, the NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. A).
(b) The input/output unit sends control code DC3 to the NC. NC stops data transmission within ten char-
acters after DC3 has been sent. The input/output unit sends control code DC1 to the NC. When it
receives DC1, NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. B.)
(4) If the CS signal of the NC is turned on when the input/output unit side terminates data processing, the NC
restarts data transmission beginning with the data immediately following the previously sent data.
(5) The NC sends control code DC4 to the input/output unit when data transmission is completed.
450
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
ER (Output)
RS (Output)
DC2 DC4
SD (Output)
DR (Input)
CS (Input)
Fig. A
ER (Output)
RS (Output)
DC2 DC4
SD (Output)
RD (Input) DC3 DC1
within 10 characters
DR (Input)
CS (Input)
1 ms or longer
Fig. B
451
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
452
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
In the cable connecting the input/output unit and RS232C interface, the SG signal and each signal must be
paired as shown in the figure below.
CNC or PMC
SD RD
External device
RD SD
RS CS
CS RS
SG SG
ER DR
DR
ER
453
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
CNC
or CD3
PMC-J
1
SD
2
10
*SD
RD
Send data
11
5
*RD
RS
Receive data
6
14
*RS
CS
Request to send
Short with RS if CS is not used.
15
12
*CS
RR
Clear to send
Short with TR
13
16
*RR
DM (DR)
Receiver ready if RR is not used.
17
3
*DM (*DR)
TR (ER)
Data mode
Short with TR
if DM is not used.
4 *TR (*ER) Terminal (CNC or PMC-J) ready
7
SG
FG
Signal ground
Security ground
454
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
RS422 Input/
Name Description
circuit No. output
RS 105 Output Request to Send This signal is turned on when data transmission
from the NC starts. It is turned off when data trans-
mission terminates.
CS 106 Input Clear to Send When both this signal and the DM signal are on, the
NC can send data. For this reason, if the input/out-
put unit cannot keep up with processing due to
punchout, etc., this signal is turned off to stop data
transmission from NC. Data transmission stops
after two characters, including the data currently
being sent, have been sent. When not using this
signal, be sure to connect it to the RS signal.
DM 107 Input Data Mode When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/out-
(DR) put unit is ready for operation. This signal is usually
connected to the signal (TR signal of the input/out-
put unit) indicating that the power of the input/output
unit is on (see Note below). The NC sends data
when this signal is on. If this signal is turned off dur-
ing data transmission, alarm SR870 DR OFF oc-
curs. When not using this signal, be sure to con-
nect it to the TR signal of the NC.
TR 108.2 Output Terminal Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that NC is ready
(ER) for operation. Also, when this signal is on, the input/
output unit must regard the SD signal as significant
information.
RR 109 Input Receiver Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/out-
put unit can send data to NC. When not using this
signal, be sure to connect it to the TR signal of the
NC.
TT 113 Output Transmission tim- This signal is not used.
ing
SG 102 Signal ground
FG 101 Security ground
A<B A>B
Driver
Function OFF ON A
Signal condition Marking Spacing B
Receiver
A
B
455
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
SD
SD
10
*SD
RD
*SD
RD
11
5
*RD
RS
*RD
RS
14
*RS
CS
*RS
CS
15
12
*CS
RR
*CS
RR
13
16
*RR
DM
*RR
DM
17
3
*DM
TR
*DM
TR
4 *TR *TR
7 SG SG
FG FG
456
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
1 SD SD
2 *SD *SD
10 RD RD
11 *RD *RD
5 RS RS
6 *RS *RS
14 CS CS
15 *CS *CS
12 RR RR
13 *RR *RR
16 DM DM
17 *DM *DM
3 TR TR
4 *TR *TR
7 SG SG
FG FG
SD RD
*SD *RD
RD SD
*RD *SD
RS CS
*RS *CS
CS RS
*CS *RS
TR RR
*TR *RR
RR TR
*RR *TR
SG SG
457
APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST B62564E1/02
Message Meaning
PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO Because MDI operation is being performed, neither parameters, setting
VARIABLE CANT REWRITE data, nor macro variables can be rewritten.
(MDI EXECUTING)
PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO Because reset operation is being performed, neither parameters, setting
VARIABLE CANT REWRITE data, nor macro variables can be rewritten.
(RESETTING)
PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO Because mode switching is being performed, neither parameters, setting
VARIABLE CANT REWRITE data, nor macro variables can be rewritten.
(MODE CHANGING)
KEY IN DATA Enter data with keys.
FORMAT ERROR The format is illegal.
WRITE PROTECT (MEMORY Input is disabled because the memory protection key (workpiece coordi-
PROTECTION KEY IN EFECT) nates, offset values, and programs) is on.
WRITE PROTECT (DATA NUMBER Parameter input is disabled because PWE (bit 0) of parameter No. 8000
8000#0/PWE IS 0) (enable/disable parameter write) is set to 0.
CHANGE TO MDI MODE An attempt was made to input parameters in mode other than the MDI
mode. Place the system in the MDI mode.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE An attempt was made to input a value, but the value exceeded the allowable
range.
TOO MANY DIGITS An attempt was made to input a value, but it was longer than the maximum
allowable number of digits.
START REJECT The start of automatic operation is not accepted.
(1)Automatic operation pause signal *SP is low.
(2)An alarm exists.
(3)The SRN signal has been sent.
(4)The program the operator wants to execute is now being edited in the
background.
(5)PTR is not ready in the tape mode.
LOCKED PARAMETER An attempt was made to enter data for a parameter, but input for that param-
eter was not allowed.
DATA NOT FOUND Data is missing.
DEVICE IS ALREADY IN USE The external input/output device channels are being used, so a device can-
not be used unless the operation is terminated. To release this state, reset
the system.
NO PROGRAM SELECTED Although no program was selected, an attempt was made to perform editing.
Before editing, select a program by searching for its program number or reg-
istering the program.
ORIGIN IMPOSSIBLE (IN RESET OR ORIGIN operation is disabled because the system is in the reset or feed
FEED HOLD) hold state.
EDIT REJECT (IN RESET OR Editing is disabled because the system is in the reset or feed hold state.
FEEDHOLD) Release the reset or feed hold state.
EDIT REJECT (PROGRAM IN Editing of a program is disabled because that program is currently running.
OPERATING)
ALREADY EXISTS An attempt was made to register a new program with an existing program
number.
NO MORE PROGRAM CANT BE Because the program memory area is full, no more programs can be regis-
ENTERED tered.
NOT EMERGENCY STOP An attempt was made to register parameters in a state other than the emer-
gency stop state. Place the system in the emergency stop state.
THE NUMBER OF PROGRAMS IS OUT Because the number of registered programs has reached the maximum
OF RANGE allowable number, no more programs can be registered.
458
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST
Message Meaning
GUARDED WORD An attempt was made to edit a word that cannot be edited. For example,
this message appears when an attempt is made to alter or delete a program
number.
NO PROGRAM NUMBER An attempt was made to write a program to tape, but no program number
was found at the beginning of the program.
COMMAND ILLEGAL USE The command cannot be used in the current CNC status. (This message
appears when HERE is specified at the beginning in program verification or
when a program restart is specified during program restart operation.)
BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT Although a program was running in the background, an attempt was made
(PROGRAM IN OPERATING) to edit that program.
BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT (SAME An attempt was made to edit a program in the background, but the program
PROGRAM ON THE FOREGROUND) was being used in the foreground. (The program, however, can be edited in
the background when the program is being reset and rewound in the fore-
ground.)
INVISIBLE PROGRAM The cursor was used to select a program, or an attempt was made to edit a
program, but the program could not be displayed (when a parameter is set
to suppress the display of that program during operation or when the pro-
gram is encrypted).
NO OPTION No option is given to a specified command.
GRAPHIC AXIS NUMBER NOT SET The parameter for selecting the graphic display axis (parameter No. 7703) is
not set.
FAIL TO OCCUPY GRAPHIC CPU Another user (such as the PC) tried to use the graphic CPU.
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE ZERO NOT Workpiece zero point manual setting was performed on the external work-
INPUT piece zero point offset.
+OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke
limit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction. Backing out the
tool in the negative direction automatically clears this warning message.
OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke
limit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction. Backing out the
tool in the positive direction automatically clears this warning message.
CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER IS An attempt was made to use the repeat search function when neither the
EMPTY) forward nor backward search function had been executed.
Before using the repeat search function, execute either the forward or back-
ward function.
CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS The previous forward or backward search operation was invalid for the NC
DIFFERENT) mode screen on which you attempted to use the repeat search function.
Retry the forward or backward search function by starting from scratch.
ALREADY EXISTS On the signal selection screen, an attempt was made to newly register a
previously registered address.
459
APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS B62564E1/02
Registration of all
programs
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key READ ALL
+INPUT
(VALUE)
460
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS
Data PWE = 1
Classifica- Mode Function
Function protection DATA
tion selection key
key No. 8000
Deletion of words,
from cursor posi- Operation menu key DELETE
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
tioned to desig- A(WORD) Word EXEC
nated word
Deletion of words Operation menu key DELETE
from cursor position KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
AEOB
to EOB
Program
P Deletion of one Operation menu key DLTWRD
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
Editing word or DELETE WORD
461
APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH
KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15) B62564E1/02
Table : Correspondence between English key and Symbolic key (Series 15)
Name English key Symbolic key Name English key Symbolic key
ALTER/
ALTER
PROGRAM key PROG CALCULATION
key CALC
PMC
PCHECK key PCHECK PMC/CNC key
CNC
INPUT/INSERT INPUT
SETTING key SETTING
key INSERT
EOB
EOB/HELP key
HELP
462
INDEX
B D
Background Editing, 166
Data displayed on the subscreen, 276
Background Graphic Display, 345 Data Input Operation, 398
Block restart, 108 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD,
392
C
DATA OUTPUT, 388
Changing language of the display, 38
Data Output Operation, 395
Changing soft keys, 31
Data Protection Key, 227
Changing the contents of the key input buffer, 29
Deleting Part Programs, 156
Changing tool length compensation in the longitudi- Description of internal selection, 430
nal direction of the tool, 86
Details of Grouping M codes, 300
Changing words and addresses (CHANGE), 175
Details of Screens, 280
Chapter selection keys, 34
Directory of Floppy Disk Files, 338
Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions,
Handling, Programming, Operation, Machine, and DISPLAY, 314
Interface, 426 Display, 144
Class B measurement of the tool length, 231 Display and setting, 210
Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Work- Display format of tool life data, 246
piece Reference Position, 231
Display of Run Times and Parts Counts, 342
Class B measurement of the workpiece reference
point, 237 Displaying and modifying a tool group, 245
Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabi- Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed, 338
net Only), 421 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip, 88
Cleaning the Tape Reader, 413 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt
and the traveled distance, 89
Clearing all tool offset values, 212
Displaying tool life data while executing a machining
Clearing execution data, 245 program, 245
Clock, 343 Drawing a tool path, 335
CNC parameter input, 398 Drawing position after the start of drawing, 352
CNC parameter output, 397 Drawing procedure, 351
CNC program input, 398 Dry Run, 137
i1
E I
Editing a displayed waveform, 359 Incremental Feed, 64
Editing Part Programs, 157 Initial Setting at PowerOn, 405
Editing part programs, 159 Initial values at the start of drawing, 353
i2
Names of RS422 Interface Signals, 454 Presetting a tool life counter, 245
NC format guidance, 182 Presetting the current position display, 323
New tool selection signal, 247 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system, 324
Note, 145 Procedure for setting graphic parameters, 350
Note for handling tape reader, 57 Program check screens, 315
Notes, 284, 404 Program Display, 314
i3
Screen Saver Function, 386 Status Display, 320
Screen Selection, 303 STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,
WHEN RESET, 439
Screens, 354
Stopping Automatic Operation, 99
Searching for a program by name, 96
Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation,
Searching for a program number or sequence num- 151
ber, 95
STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (IN-
Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a CLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION), 153
file by specifying its file name, 402
Subscreen operations, 273, 278
Selecting a Program to be Executed, 95
Subscreen states, 272
Selecting RS232C Screen, 280
Symptom and Investigation, 425
Selecting signals, 374
Selecting the graphic screen, 328
Selecting the tool data screen, 256
T
Tape Reader, 44
Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens
and Spindle Monitor Screen, 263 Tape Reader Lubrication, 415
Servo screens, 263 Tape reader with reels, 46
Setting and Display Unit, 19 Tape reader without reels, 44
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA, 210 TEST OPERATION, 136
Setting by specifying accelerations, 293 ThreeDimensional Handle Feed, 75
Setting of graphic parameters, 346 Time Stamp Function, 191
Setting screen, 288 Tool change signal, 247
Setting the Floating Reference Position, 262 Tool Life Management Data, 245
Setting the graphic parameters, 328 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers, 256
Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder Tool Offsets, 388
through MDI Operation, 408
Tool retraction and recovery, 115
Setting tool data, 257
Tool skip signal, 247
Settings, 216
Transverse Inhibit Limit Function, 311
Signal Description of RS232C Interface, 446
TROUBLESHOOTING, 425
Simple Conversational Programming, 196
Tuning screen, 289
Simultaneous automatic and manual operation, 131
Twodrive floppy cassette control, 403
Single Block, 137
Singleblock stop according to the comparison be-
tween sequence numbers, 100 V
Small CRT/MDI Panel, 386 Visually Checking the CNC System, 428
Soft key display, 30
Soft key operations, 404 W
Software Operators Panel, 252 Warning message, 30
Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length com- WARNING MESSAGE LIST, 458
pensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, Waveform data input/output, 359
86
Waveform Diagnosis Function, 354
Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling,
356 Waveform display, 358
Spindle screens, 265 What is a File, 392
Start coordinates and position, 352 When the soft keys are insufficient, 30
Starting Automatic Operation, 98 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function, 303
Starting or terminating data sampling, 358 Workpiece zero point measurement B, 309
i4
Revision Record
FANUC Series 15/150-MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATION OPERATORS MANUAL (B62564E1)
01 Aug., 1994